ee a eee ane SDT ES OT SET ST ‘ EET PGT Ne 3 ig a a ie <4 ine 4 ag A ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES VOLUME Xx! 1911 Editor EDMUND OTIS HOVEY New York Published by the Academy 1912 THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lycrum or Natural History, 1817-1876) OFFICERS, 1911 President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents--GrorcE F. Kunz, FrepErIc A. Lucas, WILLIAM CAMPBELL, R. 8. WoopworTH Recording Secretary—Evmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—Hrrmon C, Bumpus, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMituin, 40 Wall Street TAbrarian—Ratpeu W. Tower, American Museum SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chairman—GeorGE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—CuHAk Les P. Berkey, Columbia University SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—Freveric A. Lucas, American Museum Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—EpwarpD J. THaTcHER, Teachers College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University Secretary—F. LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University CONTENTS OF VOLUME XXI Page PEL Oy A Ces icevats hate etavelc suclevelovey sicher cratetasiolat setae) crevesehaleveieilel aisle Srerercieersioa dle oe vals i (Qi Wsaa oo ocodon DUB OOODOUCCOOOSOGUGUDUEOOOOD gi ttr tsetse ects t eee ee ee ii COTTE 5h 5 5.0 db OOO CeO Goal bocuE CDADeOODCE.CCG GUGOOO OL OC OnRCr DME EmCaor iii WMAteShOre EU pDiCaAtOns OtcAULNOLS s SCPALAGCCS «le cielsretelololelelslelsiciicls|s/ cies s\cleleyaic’s iii HOTS O te USE ALIONS 2 2121. c/s) -lovcic! oreo SOPaCADAOOOGOIS BOO DOD OC DOOD RCOOGOOOOT iv The Ravenswood Granodiorite. By Victor ZirEGLER. (Plates 1-II)....... il Geology of the Cortlandt Series and Its Emery Deposits. By G. SHER- BOURNE PLOGERS a) (E1ACES DET Vill) Ss. cere «c1s<.5 5 .ciale ote ci creer ohenete le efeveleuaiere 11 The Influence of Heredity and of Environment in Determining the Coat Colorssin) Mices By, 22 EH Morgan. (Plates) VII—WX5) pal a Bd (dp. BEN eve Vly. Y | 19 Gu [eal i ail ip aleve Ny, «ONE || NG ERCP aXe Ba eee Ye | Ys | Y NNN SN ‘See. Carbonates. N NNN N NNN NN N N A summary of these occurrences for each individual constituent is as follows, F denoting the absence of the mineral from the slide: a(cageteLeuehel se ivlleel ails eke © is)w alse). ¢ 0 \6..¢ = 10)4),8 6, a \¢ s.e:\0 Sie ele) 6, 8) y ae \e (oA tse eiieli= eh e).e)0 0) ¢ 0 ls «le se a alee Pee SSeS Be ee eels a6 2S Se eee eee Hornblende Ow) af'v) 6) Nie elev ala fel ve: ui) 6 0.\0,'e) @,s 0c 6, 8 6) 8) 6 0 e610 Mi wiwEe ela) \s\ «leis (6 1s)\s)\s'/\ 0) wisi) «| 6 ¢ 6) ¢.c) oe) © 6) 0) 06 (610 eve © e's «) wiella 69,0) iellsive) valle lele) es 66 © 6, 00 le)(e, m6 © 0/8.) 8 6 608 PGY: Ss) ad a) Ye 8 Y Ne OWE 3X OZ 0Z 0 Z 0Z 0Z 0Z 0Z 2F EE 13 F 1F 2F 18 F OF 4 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES GreATT CLE aes oR ee este ele aio eern as 34 ON 15) 4 OZ 2F ANU IG) bio ooo So AG e oa On nae Ob SOC ORenr 0x 20 Y¥ 0Z OF FATE COON Ae 5 SAR As, SEP ee a nner 0X 20°¥ 0Z OF JX ORUNIES Cot Glen bobbie S.cOGHee OO cao Me Ae ric OIe 0X 20-Y OZ OF Ie Adt a ae ae en see Uc etvato sxc as ote siaeia eae 0x ons 0Z 13 F Pye AOUIGS ee Breet civic slacole Fieie's"olayc's Oke mime 0x 5 Y 0Z 15 F NIA OME Me Rete ines os olers a s&s. she cere evel siptas 0X ae 0Z ILS (CanlOI Lester Bictar (eis oss okie 2th =e oes eves secs 0x Om UAE 8 F TRSYOININ, 2 6.4 So Hons Rp OOO OR nee e ao nh orca .c 0X Ons 14Z 6F From this summary, we see that quartz, orthoclase, oligoclase, horn- blende and biotite are the essential minerals, and that garnet, titanite, zircon and apatite are the common accessories, while microcline, anortho- clase, augite, pyrite, pyrrhotite and magnetite are rarer. The acid min- erals are dominant. Granite Phase The hand specimen shows a medium dark gray rock, evenly and finely granitoid in texture and essentially composed of quartz, feldspar, horn- blende and mica. Pink garnets of small size are present throughout the specimen and give it a mottled appearance. The rock is slightly gneissoid. The feldspars are fresh and semi-transparent and show polysynthetic twinning. The hornblende is a dark green variety, sometimes almost. black. Under the microscope, great differences in the size of grains are no- ticed, and there is also a tendency for the smaller grains of quartz and feldspar to surround the larger ones. The small individuals seem to be the result of the crushing to which the rock was subjected. Fractures are common in the rock and are coated with limonite and in some cases with quartz. The following minerals have been identified in the slide: quartz, orthoclase, anorthoclase and hornblende as essential minerals, also micro- cline, oligoclase, garnet, titanite, apatite, zircon, augite, magnetite and pyrite. Secondary alteration is slight, although limonite and kaolin are noticeable. The quartz occurs allotriomorphically and also as small elongated prisms included in the feldspars. The latter case show between crossed nicols a fine rim of interference colors. Included in the quartz are zircon, apatite, biotite and fine trails of dust. Some of the quartzes have deep embayments and irregular outlines due to resorption. Nearly all show wavy extinction. The predominant feldspar is orthoclase. This is, as a rule, allotrio- morphic. Microperthitic structure is faintly developed. Carlsbad twins are common. Cleavage parallel to (010) is well marked, not so strong ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE 5 parallel to (001). Several grains of microcline are present usually show- ing, between crossed nicols, the characteristic “Scotch-plaid” structure. The plagioclase is of the oligoclase type and is twinned according to the albite law, although some patches are twinned under the pericline law in addition. The bands due to the latter law are commonly the wider. In- clusions of all the other minerals occur. The hornblende is a dark green variety, in irregular shreds and grains. Good cleavage is shown parallel to (110) and strong absorption along this. The pleochroism is intense, ranging from dark olive green to light green to yellowish brown. The extinction angle is 21 degrees. Light green augite is present. It has weak pleochroism and an extinc- tion angle of 36 degrees. Uralitization has developed, and the greater part of the augite has gone over into green hornblende. This uralite closely resembles the other hornblende in the rock in appearance and in optical properties. Both augite and hornblende seem to be primary min- erals, and the alteration of the augite seems to be the result of the pressure which is also suggested by the wavy extinction and the crushed rims. Brown biotite is present in small amounts, some of it as an alteration product of the hornblende. It then spreads along the cracks towards the center of the grains of hornblende. It is also present in small shreds and in lath-shaped crystals and often occurs in beautiful aggregates. The garnet in this type of the rock is light red in color, pale pink in thin sections. It is associated with the darker minerals. Magnetite and pyrite are usually present in small amounts. Titanite, zircon and apatite are found in all slides. Chemical analysis: Per cent IOS. pabidtcU deen dood dc OC UOT aS COO In OS renee enact 75.61 INUGH deabt tet pddacodd6c bo COD OC OC: Rene aera ices PER HO ramyafet thterctarelater ete) ates to) cia Slee eraile esale 6. 6 eyelv'a7a\e aches whaleiere Pape INZO) Gady wb bos 60H ODOR ECONO OD OURLOO Oe OCC eerie 86 WIEO) Seda AbGR OOS GUS OO DO EIEIO CIEE TCI aS 20 CRYO): Sr SPA b 6 OOS GOTO CHEE LET CNC MERC RO NERC IO a Re sees) 140) 54 A oid OO HIELO OI OC IO ECO DEIO OCI CISC IGOR Rao rae 3.18 INO Beererei evel totoneict ciererectetsversislcharste lens) shel seus erecta oie oS ielaverallerausls aya IBLO) So Gada Uo OGOG Ec cOC 6 DOGO TIBCTEC DeICIC apn orion 6 09 101.25 Recasting into the component minerals we obtain Per cent (QUEIIA opts Ob COG obs DO RROOE DEO a ROA ODODE RO OU CO SOO 31.62 ORUMO CLASS eters rererai lore hiss 'exerelissole: orev stolavetet tev cues ober enctsteraterebere 16.68 6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES Per cent JNU OEIC HRCI AACS GOODE aD Oooo do DOA COU Bae .83 GIOSSUIATITC (oo ois oe Sesis arse ats cies 6 ate store ansttersiotelsteweletoceleters< 1.35 PAUTTIVATIGI UC ere roc. cire,s tavere. 8 sa)6 lo oi re.0. 8 ole we emecotoh Meno CeToE Peters 1.49 18 Ko) gc 6) (2000 (A Re AA RIA ACLONGTY cir, cow 0 oc. 8 ODI 2.83 SI OELES Bebb ate wi aval Sate ss ostere soa jo chek a elaievalel alevate enReeeaneter ates ke IU 7 Ee 13 Ginko eee eee nciccc moe asc bind bom odo ae 1.28 101.27 Diorite Phase From this highly acidic type, the Ravenswood rock varies through inter- mediate stages to a quartz-diorite. It is then darker gray in color, medium in grain and slightly gneissic in structure. The mass of the rock is made up of oligoclase, green hornblende, brown biotite and garnet. Under the microscope, orthoclase, augite, zircon, titanite, apatite, pyrrho- tite, pyrite, magnetite and kaolin were also identified. Here, as in the more acid type, the rock is granitoid with the component grains irregular in outline and interlocking. In size, they average about .8 to 1 mm. in diameter. Oligoclase is the predominent feldspar. Polysynthetic twinning is shown, sections parallel to which have extinction angles of about seven degrees. Pericline twinning and Carlsbad twinning also occur, and in several cases all three are in combination. Strong wavy extinction is shown. Inclusions of hornblende, biotite, apatite, zircon and pyrrhotite are common. The hornblende and the augite are of the same type as described in the granite phase and show the same alteration. The alteration of the augite is especially well shown. This takes place from the edges of the grains toward the center, but in some cases the change has taken place through- out the entire grain, the surface of which is spotted and blotchy from the formation of hornblende. A chemical analysis of the typical diorite rock gave the following result : Per cent SLO Svc ec Se Rei alae kena rete re elie otto faledotalcle Creda, sit eheeyst MeeeL teas 64.98 IRV Olg'oi5's SOS OMS haga leter ore ehatic caterers oi shetene, ofele nuaite @, 6: sistBtal eis ce MRT LO GLO), | (a ste evens eee eter tetotensie le 2 8 aratherasoraie enais/ 910,019 @ieleter stores 50 OO) io cos eee he eee aed Masa ore kouete of ava: oiate Sie lee reiait ah 2:00 1 Cee 0 RE PEED, 33.0) cy in ERD POS LOLA ONG 0 Sidon ene ns CRONE core RC 93 CSO ivkicis oo cient ee lordiole ie oh Pore iwlate sets Rists| ote s/eie fee 4.23 1. OEE INT 56 Bbc kin Scki0Ao OO GO COORG CMe 1.84 INGO cia tla Sin Pee erectus etA RE ese oo wae ots oie §.22 NS 2 0 RRR AR Ae RPE Cro BIND CIE cl CCLRC ROR ERR RRC Be 11 ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE Y Recasting into the component minerals we obtain Per cent QUAL ee sel sis cece ereleveras UP aNoLWeliot oi cPepopsicieuerce petri hayare estas 18.48 Orthoclase 2.3... PS IDE CUO IE OCICS OS HOSS Sar 8.34 INVONIGY Bo aoe ae a iiss wal sueirairene tate raat avonten sreicnste mete lake Ai aren nisia lay wi gkertons 44.02 PATOL OL oe oo: avenici'ar «. die7s crave ehererenaysenetare oft SOD Oro este LOO GROSSUIAT ICS Bie os}. s,5 aia si 5}. alone aa Mo ato a pee sie nora ct eel alc 2.25 PAUIMANGIC Pe os <6 cis cm sos We OMe OM eeu SaaS Oa os 3.48 Hornblende and Augite....... oud) aheh sitet @taiat elslevouelete Saas. 5 5 UePatl LOGIE Mars crc, sess ats sie asi wl'a''s chore ata my oua oes aay a itueLa ane al onatias 1.05 Corundumyes ss. Sraiaee gen Sereisvers onernie SSUES ASS as 5 Oks MASI CLILAM ye Face Lklc cis ssn we dd dnenddas A Wale a eet aces 70 PROBABLE EXTENT OF THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE AS DISCLOSED BY BoRINGS Aside from the actual outcrops of the granodiorite so far discussed, records of it are found in borings undertaken in the drift-covered areas. Thus, north of the exposures and slightly southeast of Lawrence Point the Consolidated Gas Company of New York while drilling for water put down an eighteen-hundred foot borehole. The entire core is the typical Ravenswood rock. Again, south of the actual exposures, a series of bor- ings* is now available from the corner of Myrtle Avenue and Gold Street. Brooklyn, across the East River into Manhattan, as far as Hester and Allen Streets. Several other drill records are also known as depicted on the map. In all of these, the core is a massive gray rock, in all respects like the exposed Ravenswood. It has the same appearance, texture and mineral composition, and it seems io be a part of the same igneous mass. Whether the rock is actually continuous so as to include all these areas, cannot be said with certainty, but the conclusion seems probable, and the corresponding extent has been so indicated on the accompanying map. ORIGIN OF THE GARNET Some of the cores brought up on the above line and located near the intersection of John and Bridge Streets show a highly garnetiferous rock, reddish-brown in color. The rock is finely granitoid. Under the micro- scope, the following minerals were found: garnet and quartz as essential, also some feldspar, which varied extremely in different specimens, and %The corundum molecule in this and the following analyses is probably to a great extent contained in the biotite. 4The borings and cores here referred to, samples from which were made available for this study, belong to the series of explorations made by the New York City Board of Water Supply along the proposed line of the distribution conduit for Catskill water. 8 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES some biotite, hornblende, titanite, apatite, pyrite and zircon. The garnet occurs in small grains closely bunched and cemented by quartz. They appear to be the crushed fragments of originally large garnets. An analysis gave Per cent SIO EE oc iegition Acc ok een ee Rhee eee Pere rene 52.82 LUO as aa REMC a Orme SO e yo Goaoh do Sab aco 22.75 INMOM Sagenactodd duencedad soWoos op oodb don oaddaos ones HESS) 1G Oe anne errr a contra odbonda aed 9.50 MEOMs cc cist da woke eee PEER ERO EE REE eC EERE ROE eC EEE alicy (O}:10 ea Aer Pe Ia a RIN AMa nS Sa deuutEA Gd Gon Acco Kdo gon. a6 % 7.43 EO) Bavaieldlerorraiolele sissere wise Misvaehe orele Va eeom et Rr Re ea oRtenener one 86 INEM OM AA Gam OSU nS OOOO GOODGIC OOOO OOOOH ON CHObORO Soo 0,0 123 13 0 Wee eo ac UA tot et aie oer eeRMine Bele Oecdtic Bicier e aaa 14 98.87 Recasting into the component minerals we obtain Per cent OUCHEWAL po OUdo O.6co GOS MA COD AIOA MMOS aU mG Ooaecdacke 22.44 @MUEEHOCIAS@ Mee ere eieierele 6 ie aiave. clsieelsrisl one toils ovens totetofoletensheneroteeonatte 2.78 PAUP ILO a aetene racers. ctiaFe a te ole vaia a\istele lo: l0 sys /o oe leucvav ese ehcreiel reletome tere 10.48 ANITORUOILE A Sagic-d Aguado GOO On Mae OO SOUS TOGO Ano OC 8.34 CUVOSSUM ETUC prise eh rare coiers jo te-s sieyatate,cxecsveystencieaeretovel steteronebetenenets 13.50 PANTING tasereretapevare ale letevs (cielictensre elerenerelclonehodeyabareneveteleNerotenetat= 14.94 IRICEN NMOS. Sa caocanncdocma os OQuNbUMsouUC Uda acodaggonoC PPS IDOI oon Dro OCOD OO DMOGDaOOs AOU emo Oo Oaoaca Gonos aNdC 1.53 (OD TAULTD CULT a eeve reeves ove rave areye Ge aie se ote tencicks Concreeteredel cictietere ores tober .82 IGGIICRO NM GGpe ays cisrs aves ctorere & cheers ciclo eiterioiS ecto eke ter 2.08 Glancing over the analysis, we see that this variety of the rock is very low in silica, as compared with the other two phases. It is high in alumina, lime and ferrous oxide. The latter three constituents are in the garnet, thus making it a composite of the grossularite and almandite molecules. There is also a decrease in the amount of soda and potash. On the whole, the rock has the appearance of a contact zone developed from an aluminous and ferruginous limestone, which furnished part of the lime, alumina and iron necessary for the formation of the garnet. Or else the aggregate may be due to the absorption of a mass of impure limestone in the granodiorite. Since Professor Berkey has shown that there are interbedded limestones practically everywhere in the Fordham gneiss, this explanation seems to the writer to be the best. According to Van Hise,® combined contact and mechanical action furnish the most favorable conditions for the formation of garnets, which are usually the 5 Monograph on ‘“‘Metamorphism,” p. 300. ZIEGLER, THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE 9 result of the rearrangement of two or more adjacent minerals. It is diffi- cult to say just what minerals formed the garnet occurring so extensively throughout the granodiorite, but the following reactions are offered. Anorthite + wollastonite = grossularite + quartz CaO, A1,0;,2SiO, + 2(CaO,SiO,) == 3Ca0,Al,0;,3Si0, + SiO, Anorthite + hypersthene = garnet + quartz CaO, Al,O3,2SiO, + 2( (MgFe)O,Si0O,) = Ca0,2(MgFe)O,A1,0;,3Si0, + SiO, Pyroxene == anorthite = amphibole- (MgFe)0, (AlFe),0;,Si0,,2(MgO,Si0,) + 2(CaO, Al,03,2Si0,) = 2(CaO) (MgFe)0O, pyroxene molecule + garnet + quartz (AlFe),0,,3Si0, -++ 2(Mg0O,Al,0;,Si0O,) + 3Si0, Starting with orthoclase, the following reaction might take place. Orthoclase + pyroxene =r wollastonite + hypersthene + K,0,A1,03,6S8i0, + 2( (MgFe) O,(AlFe),0;,Si0,) + 2(Ca0,SiO,)+ (MgFe)0,SiO, + water—garnet — biotite “= H,O=2Ca0, (Mg¥e)0O, Al,O;,3Si0,4-2((HK)O, (AlFe),0;,2Si0,)2((MgFe)O,SiO,)+ quartz 38i0, Yielding in this last case a complex garnet, biotite and quartz. COMPARISON WITH THE HARRISON GRANODIORITE A comparison of the Ravenswood granodiorite with the Harrison grano- diorite as described by H. Ries® was made for the purpose of determining any relationship which might exist between the two rocks. Professor Ries says, regarding the Harrison diorite, “Throughout its extent, the rock has a pronounced gneissic structure. Strong effects of folding and crushing with the consequent formation of ‘augen’ of quartz and feldspar are shown. The rock varies from a more or less massive gneiss . . . to a mica-schist. The minerals forming the granite are quartz, plagioclase, biotite, hornblende, orthoclase, and in lesser amounts garnet, tita- nite, zircon, apatite, muscovite, and microline. “Quartz composes from two fifths to one half of the rock. It occurs in grains and in rounded masses, filling the spaces between the other minerals. The grains are often cracked and show undulatory extinction and zonal struc- ture. Dustlike inclusions are often present and are arranged in more or less parallel rows, which often extend across the cracks from one grain to another. Intergrowths with plagioclase are not uncommon, especially around the edges of the feldspar augen. “The plagioclase is rich in inclusions of biotite, apatite, and zircon, but ¢Trans. N. Y. Acad. Sci., vol. xiv, p. 80. 10 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENSES smaller undeterminable ones are present in countless numbers. Some of the plagioclases show microperthitie structure. “Orthoclase is less abundant than the quartz and the plagioclase. Microcline is rare. Biotite composes about one half of the rock. MHornblende is less in amount than the quartz, its pleochroism is green to brown.” Considering this description, we may establish the following points: 1. The rocks have the same mineral composition. 2. Texturally, they agree closely. Both are gneissic and show augen of quartz and feldspar, crushed rims, interpenetration of quartz and feldspar. undulatory extinction, etc. 3. Micro-perthite is present in both. 4. The hornblende shows the same pleochroism. These points seem to bring out a strong similarity in the two rocks. We must remember, however, that this similarity may well exist in rocks of the same group which may come from widely separated localities. These points of semblance are offset by the following contrasts: 1. Quartz is very abundant in the Harrison granodiorite where it forms as much as one half of the rock. In much of the Ravenswood rock, it is present in small amounts and in some cases is absent entirely. 2. The gneissic structure is present throughout the Harrison diorite, but it is lacking in much of the Ravenswood rock. 3. No muscovite was found in the latter. 4. Biotite is far more abundant in the former. 5. No augite was described from the Harrison occurrence, and no uralite was noticed. Considering both of the above groups of points, it seems to the writer that the Ravenswood is not a continuation of the Harrison granodiorite. He believes that there are two distinct igneous bodies, of which one, the Harrison, has been the more thoroughly metamorphosed. PETROGRAPHIC LABORATORY, COLUMBIA UNIVERSITY. Fic. Fie. W1e. 3. Fia. Fig. Fig. PLATH I PHOTOMICROGRAPHS OF RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE . Alteration of augite (A) into uralite (Hb). Biotite (B) and feldspar (F). Field, 1.7 mm. . Shows the relation of biotite (B), hornblende (Hb), garnet (G) and feldspar (EF). Field, 1.7 mm. The garnet phase. Garnet (G), biotite (B) and quartz (Q). Tield, 1.7 mm. - . Nest of biotite laths (B), with feldspar (F), quartz (Q), apatite (A) and zircon (Z). Field, 1.7 mm. . Microperthitic feldspar (F) and quartz (Q) between crossed nicols. Field, 1.7 mm. . The diorite phase. Hornblende (Hb) and oligoclase (F). Field, 1.7 mm, Se co eee 4 ‘ ee dads fhe Pete . poor yote e he petiat inti at yene 2 : ee , bi ed i Se ee ee Ree . * remand in both? aa abe ne elie? -aretaoidoK a0 usrmansr bi ae a ; cole Sits similar | Sea ‘ in bo (Q atitoit a, osileur ee Ca gitar te | B ‘ace (oy scr amy bunks a) » stile eae ee 4 I aan rca ‘igeblod itive rata sHitoid 0 Jea% - 1 seria as port (Xo oF DBS rn d ; 2 . ato mo Wy ay ba ae) taebit sisson a 5 ot -. > pome on Gs Fach ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Scr VOLUME XXI, Puate I RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE » a ¢ s o be Wid ae ae ae ETS A IT a ss PLATE II DISTRIBUTION OF THE RAVENSWOOD GRANODIORITE Map showing the outcrops of the Ravenswood granodiorite in solid black; the boreholes reaching it, in black circular spots, and its probable extent, in broken lines. Pe ry oe i- = 3 ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. XXI, pp. 11-86, pll. II-VI Editor, EpMunp Otis Hovey GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY DEPOSITS BY G. SHERBURNE ROGERS NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 15 May, 1911 THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum or NaTuRAL History, 1817-1876) OFFIcErs, 1911 President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GnoRGE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas, R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—Hunry EH. Crampton, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMIittin, 40 Wall Street TAbrarian—Ratrxu W. Tower, American Museum SECTION OF GHOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chatrman—GerorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—CuHakLES P. Berkey, Columbia University SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—Freveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WIt1L1AM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—EpwarpD J. THatcoHer, Teachers’ College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University Secretary—F rEDERIC Lyman WELLS, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o'clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Scr., Vol. XXI, pp. 11-86, Pll. III-VI. 15 May, 1911] GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY DEPOSITS? By G. SHERBURNE ROGERS (Presented in abstract before the Academy, 6 March, 1911) CONTENTS Page GINS CaP MEN IG LOLA ete ora ati toe ole) s ‘aval Gials dro. oe Slat wore dela wile: eleveideeetaldaverkie 4 eletersiaeaee 11 MAES eterna all MEMENTO RT Pal eats ey Yo tel cts) & jo: 1s aitol'a,e' Guede ws ow wile, dude duel ayaraya'd anwel #dlens ausveveee 13 CORE IGM: Sato s deh A Ry 2 ae ee erie ee YW 19 . PURDIOENS \ clad aeons Ge Bt ae Gre ee ee ee aa an a OR 20 LAO MOCKS MERE ee Reger ace aerials alislevaliels a) e' bie ay due ia celeleis ace io elk meee eee 20 PPP URC BTS() CAGE MEEREY Ourers LTA EH SMe re anata ck add felts axe dele iae alehel 6 disregarded. James D. Dana, in 1880, described these rocks in connection with his work on the limestone belts of Westchester County, being the first geolo- gist to recognize them as genetically related and to study them as a whole. In his first paper,® he describes the rocks, classifying them as chrysolitic and non-chrysolitic, and subdividing further into hornblendic, hypers- thenic, augitic and biotitic rocks. He then discusses their origin. Since they occur on Verplanck Point as dikes and stringers in the limestone and schist, showing contact effects, he is led to believe that at one time they had been molten, or at least plastic. From the considerable number of schist and limestone inclusions in the western part of the district, which generally lie approximately conformable to the strike of the main sur- rounding areas of these rocks, he concludes that the Cortlandt Series is a mass of old sediment, worked over by pressure and great heat ; these inclu- sions would then be merely cases of unobliterated bedding. He finally discusses the very sudden minor variations in the igneous rocks (which are most frequent on Montrose Point) and believes that these also demand * Geology of New York, pt. I, Geology of the First District, p. 528. 1843. 5“Geognostische Skizze der Umgegend von New York,”’ Zeit. der deut. geol. Gesell- schaft, XVII, 390. 1865. 6 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 194. 1880. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 15 this explanation, arguing that sediment may change suddenly in composi- tion but that igneous flows are constant over large areas. For the source of the heat, he postulates extreme local metamorphism of some kind. In his second paper,’ he reviews the above arguments and proceeds to the question of the origin and nature of the sediments. The rocks are so very different in composition from the surrounding sedimentary rocks that some peculiar local development must be postulated. There are three hypotheses: (1) the material may have been contributed by the Archean Highlands as detritus, or (2) as detritus supplemented by in- gredients from the ocean, or (3) it may have been originally volcanic ashes. While expressing no definite opinion, Dana appears to favor the last theory, since successive outbursts might be very different in composi- tion and yet come to rest in close juxtaposition. He suggests that the voleanic source lay in the present bed of the Hudson, between Verplanck and Montrose Points. In his third paper,® he describes the phenomena exposed by the (then) new railroad cut through Stony Point, which he considers entirely indica- tive of the true igneous nature of the more basic members of the series at least. He abandons, of course, all of the above theories; and this affords an excellent example of the frankness, honesty and sincerity which char- acterizes his hfe and work. George H. Williams, at about this time, started a minute petrographic study of the various types in the district, Dana having called his attention to the wealth of variation exhibited. He did not, however, publish his first paper until 1886.9 After reviewing Dana’s work, he announces his intention of describing the types petrographically, beginning with the most basic; then the contact metamorphism in the schist around the bor- ders ; and finally of giving his theoretical conclusions and generalizations. Starting with peridotite, he describes hornblende peridotite, devoting con- siderable time to the schiller structure so often found in all the rocks of the series, and then augite peridotite (picrite), giving an analysis of the latter. He takes up each mineral, discussing its general habit and its special peculiarities in these rocks, and often drawing valuable and schol- arly comparisons with its occurrences abroad. His second paper?® is on the norites, which, he says, are by far the most abundant type in the district and cover the whole township east of the ™*Origin of the Rocks of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXII, 103. 1881. 8 “Note on the Cortlandt and Stony Point Hornblendie and Augitic Rock,” Amer. Jour. Sei., (3), XXVIII, 384. 1884. 9 ““Peridotites of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (8), XXXI, 26. 1886. 10 “‘Norites of the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXIII, 135, 191. 1887. 16 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . railroad. A glance at the map suffices to show the incompleteness of his knowledge as regards the distribution. He discusses first norite proper ; then hornblende norite, mica norite, augite norite and finally pyroxenite. Under mica norite, he describes the “Butler Section,” a cliff in which norite proper, augite norite and other rocks are arranged in layers. He ascribes it to ordinary metamorphism. This and similar cases have been described by the present writer’ and will be discussed in the paper here contributed. Williams states also in this paper that the emery is a segre- gation in the norite and discusses in this connection the composition of the ore as compared with that of Ronsperg, Bohemia. In a later note,* he gives an analysis of the orthoclase of these rocks, which removes the suspicion that it may be merely unstriated plagioclase. Williams’s third paper?’ is on the gabbros and diorites. He states that the gabbro is a rather rare rock; but adds that it always shows metamor- phism and always occurs adjoining the limestone, therefrom deducing the fact that it is a hybrid formed by the action of the norite magma on this latter rock. He divides the diorites into hornblende and mica diorite. Under the caption hornblende diorite, he describes in turn brown horn- blende diorite, hornblendite, green hornblende diorite and mica horn- blende diorite. He subdivides mica diorite into mica diorite proper, hornblende mica diorite, hypersthene mica diorite and quartz mica diorite. In concluding, he states that the series is due to long-continued igneous action, different types being successively produced which broke through those already solidified, the more acid types apparently appearing last. This concludes his petrographic study, and notwithstanding the incom- pleteness of his knowledge of the distribution and extent of the types, his work stands as a well-rounded and scholarly investigation. His nomen- clature is particularly felicitous; in a district of such multifarious differ- entiations, the free use of mineral prefixes is preferable to the adoption of a number of new terms. It is greatly to be regretted that Professor Williams’s untimely death prevented the further prosecution of his work in the district; a complete study of the magmatic differentiation in the Cortlandt Series would have been indeed valuable from a petrologist of his experience and perspicacity. Consonant with his original plan, having completed his study of the igneous rocks themselves, he describes their effect on the surrounding u “Original Gneissoid Structure in the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (4), XXXI, 123: AOE 122 Op. cit., p. 243. 13 ““Gabbros and Diorites of the Cortlandt Series,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 438. 1888. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 17 rocks.1* He here states that the emery may be referred with certainty to contact action on pre-existent material, apparently abandoning his former view. In studying the other contact effects, he concentrated on several linear sections, in the first two of which he describes the succession from ordinary mica schist to the same rock carrying sillimanite, then to a rock composed of sillimanite, mica and garnet, and finally to a garnetiferous mica diorite. Analyses show that the change in the schist is in the direc- tion of an increased alumina and iron content as the massive rocks are approached. In the last section of the massive rocks on the limestone, he finds that lime-bearing hornblende and pyroxene are formed along the contact. He finally compares the effects here with those in several Euro- pean localities, showing that a larger number of contact minerals is found in the Cortlandt than anywhere else. The contact effects were thus shown to be well developed, a point which will be reverted to in the discussion of the genesis of the emery. James F. Kemp,’® in 1888, described the Rosetown extension of the series; he had also been over the main area under the guidance of Pro- fessor Williams. This smaller body les about a mile west of Stony Point and is itself about three quarters of a square mile in extent. It is sur- rounded by gneiss and encloses a small patch of marble. The rocks them- selves are all diorites, no hypersthene or olivine having been found in them. Green augite occasionally assumes importance, but in the main it is subordinate to the brown and green hornblende. Emery, similar to that found in the main area, oecurs in these rocks. There is very notice- able contact action along the borders, and numerous dikes radiate out into the surrounding rocks. Six analyses are given in connection with the petrographic description, three of the rocks and three of isolated minerals. William H. Hobbs'® has described the Connecticut extensions of the series in an article which unfortunately is not particularly well known. Two areas were found by him in the crystalline upland of western Con- necticut, which resemble the original Cortlandt area both in the abun- dance of norites and in the elaborate magmatic differentiation; these constitute the northeasterly extension of the Cortlandt. The Prospect Hill area, which is the larger and more important of the two, covers about 40 square miles in the township of Litchfield, although 144“‘Contact Metamorphism produced in the adjoining Mica Schist and Limestone by the Rocks of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 254. 1888. 15“QOn the Rosetown Extension of the Cortlandt Series,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 247. 1888. 16 Festschrift zum siebzigsten Geburtstage von Harry Rosenbusch, p. 25, Stuttgart. 1906. 18 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES most of the types are found in a small patch about two miles square at Prospect Hill itself. The igneous rocks are included in highly metamor- phosed gneiss, quartzite and schist of pre-Cambrian and early Paleozoic age, so that they are probably post-Ordovician. Along the border, there is generally a mosaic of block faults. The rocks may carry considerable percentages of pyrrhotite and chalcopyrite, which are exploited in many prospect holes known locally as “nickel mines.” Hobbs describes the rocks as varieties of the following types: gabbroitic. noritic, olivine- hypersthene gabbroitic, dioritic, peridotitic, pyroxenitic and grano-dio- ritic. Although his system of nomenclature differs somewhat from that followed in the present paper, it seems that all of these types are counter- parts of those found in thé main area. The most salient points of differ- ence are the abundance of somewhat more basic plagioclase and of chal- copyrite and pyrrhotite, with the absence of emery, in the Connecticut areas. Five complete and valuable analyses are given, and the differentia- tion is very suggestively summarized in a series of Brégger diagrams, In the smaller, New Fairfield, area, the rocks are all of a dioritic nature, resembling in this respect the Rosetown, N. J., extension. From the description given, it is evident that the larger area at least would warrant close study ; it is to be regretted that the boundaries of the main districts, and the approximate distribution of the many interesting types described, have not been more thoroughly worked out. Charles P. Berkey,** in connection with an exhaustive study of the geology of the Highlands and the region to’the south, has materially added to our knowledge of the Cortlandt Series. He has been the first geologist to map the boundaries; the writer has, of course, gone over the same ground in connection with this present study, and the results are entirely concordant. To Dr. Berkey also belongs the credit for the recog- nition of the acid extreme of the series; the large granite area to the northeast of the main body was overlooked by both Dana and Williams. As will be shown later, there is every reason for considering this an inte- gral part of the series; and if this be so, it completes the line of differen- tiation from the most acid to the most basic, being thus an important consideration from a theoretical standpoint. The writer is under great obligation to Dr. Berkey for this as yet unpublished information. This, then, constitutes the whole of the work done on the Cortlandt Series. As will be seen, some of it has been superficial, some ill-directed and some disproportionately minute. Kemp’s work on the Rosetown 17 “Structural and stratigraphic features of the basal gneisses of the Highlands,” Bull. N. Y¥. State Museum, 107 (Geology 12). 1907. This paper is the first in connection with this study and is not concerned with the Cortlandt Series. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES. 19 extension is complete in itself, as is that of Hobbs on the Connecticut areas ; but as for the main area, the most recent work done on it—that of Berkey on the boundaries—is what should have been the earliest. Owing to this somewhat unfortunate reversal, there are several erroneous concep- tions extant concerning the series; and the writer, while not pretending to the experience of Dana or the erudition of Williams, hopes in the fol- lowing pages to give a correct general notion of the rocks as a whole, leay- ing to later investigators that part of the more specialized work which is yet undone. CORRELATION The correlation of the series is, like that of many such igneous masses, open to considerable speculation. Evidence of its age with respect to the surrounding rocks is indubitable; in a number of places, marked contact action is shown, and on Verplanck’s Point especially a number of igneous dikes are intruded into the schist and limestone, so that the Cortlandt series is unquestionably younger. ‘The lower limit, then, is dependent on the age of the Manhattan schist and the associated Inwood limestone. There is, however, considerable difference of opinion as regards the correlation of these rocks. A. C. Spencer’® and his associates regard them as the metamorphosed equivalents of the Cambrian and Ordovician, which occur in an unaltered condition north of the Highlands. C. P. Berkey,?® on the other hand, who has been mapping the Tarrytown and West Point Quadrangles in the Highlands of New York, finds that the Manhattan schist and Inwood limestone are separated by unconformities from both the basement gneiss series below and the Poughquag quartzite above, this latter representing the base of the Paleozoic. The schist and limestone are therefore pre-Cambrian. The Cortlandt Series has been intruded into these rocks and is there- fore at least later than pre-Cambrian time. Moreover, since the schist and limestone were strongly metamorphosed, probably in the Green Moun- tain upheaval, the series must be post-Ordovician. There is no criterion, however, by which we can fix the upper limit. Van Hise and Leith?° make the following rather cryptic remark: “The rocks of the Cortlandt Series (the clastics) of the original Taconic area and of the upper series of the Adirondacks are of the same age, 1. e., Taconic, or Lower Cam- 18 A, C. SPENCER summarizes his own work and that of W. S. Bayley in New Jersey, and the work of E. C. Eckel and F. J. H. Merrill in New York, in Bulletin 360, U. S. G. S., “Precambrian Geology of North America,’ by Van Hise and Leith, p. 634. 1909. 12 Op. cit., pp. 361-378. 2 Op. cit., p. 319. 20) ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES brian.” The writer is not aware of any clastics in the Cortlandt Series. nor does there seem to be any justification for calling the series Lower Cambrian. There is a general lithologic similarity with the upper series of the Adirondacks, but the almost entire absence of metamorphism in the Cortlandt Series, coupled with the surprising freshness of the olivine present, are rather strong indications of a considerably later date. The Triassic trap of New Jersey is so entirely different in structure that the Cortlandt Series has probably no relationship with it: and from the litho- logic character of later igneous masses and from the fact that no meta- morphism has taken place in the East since the Permian, it is practically certain that the series is not post-Permian. Jkemp’s study of the Rose- town extension fully confirms this view; he finds** that the rocks here cut the (Cambrian) Tompkin’s Cove limestone but have not disturbed the Triassic sandstones. Hobbs’s work in Connecticut is also entirely con- cordant. The whole expanse of the Paleozoic is, however, open; and while nothing can be definitely said, it is the writer’s opinion that the Cortlandt Series is younger than is generally supposed, more probably late Paleozoic than early Cambrian. PETROLOGY In the following descriptions of the various types, the rocks will be con- sidered in the order of their acidity, and frequent reference will be made to the large geological map. In the case of the common rock minerals, at least, an effort has been made to condense as far as possible the mass of data which has accumulated from the description of the 260 slides exam- ined and to render the optical descriptions reasonably brief and succinct. In every case, the fullest description of the various minerals is given under the important rocks in which they are the most abundant or of which they are the most typical. Williams, in the papers cited above, has sometimes given fuller and more minute optical discussions of the min- erals than is here considered necessary. PLUTONIC ROCKS Granite The granite member of the series lies to the northeast of the main body and extends from south of the Crompond Road northward to Lake Mohe- gan. It covers an area of about 3% miles, and throughout its extent it appears to be very uniform in texture and composition. The exact bor- 2 Op. cit., p. 253. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 21 ders of the area are not, however, susceptible of close determination; a heavy blanket of drift covers the district and obscures the geology. Out- crops are few and are generally considerably altered, except when the rock is artificially exposed. The land surface is on the whole rather flat for a rock of this character, as compared to the hilly topography southward ; this may be due to the fact that it lies in the lee of the Highlands, which would eause an undue accumulation of till at this point, fading away to the south. The granite is surrounded in general by mica schist, but to the northwest lies an area of pinkish granitic gneiss, related to the typical Highland gneisses. As stated above, the credit for the recognition of this rock as part of the Cortlandt series belongs to Dr. Berkey. He has as yet published only a short note on the subject.2* Dana does not mention this area at all; and since he apparently guided Williams over the country, the latter likewise overlooked it. Closer work on the geology, however, reveals its unmistakable relationship with the neighboring basic rocks. Its entire lack of (megascopic) metamorphism separates it sharply from the sur- rounding schists and gneisses and places its age as approximately the same as that of the rocks to the south. It has undergone about the same de- gree of weathering as have the basic rocks. Furthermore the latter are frequently penetrated by aplite and pegmatite dikes, which are closely akin to the granite; these are especially abundant in the northern part of the basic area. There are, however, apparently no areas of granite in the latter district ; the acidic flow seems to have been more sharply separated than the various intermediate and basic facies of the magma. The pene- tration of the basic rocks by the acidic dikes would seem to indicate that the acid extreme of the series is the youngest; the chronological and chemical relations of the various members will, however, be more fully discussed at the end of the petrographical descriptions. In the hand specimen, the granite is practically white when fresh, being made up almost entirely of quartz and feldspar, with very subor- dinate amounts of muscovite and biotite. The rock is generally weath- ered at the surface to a faint dirty brownish color, owing to the formation of epidote. The grain is medium, and the rock is very firm. A number of specimens were taken from the surface outcrops; several from the quarries, and one from a diamond drill boring at the 200 ft. level. The thin sections show that the rock is remarkably uniform in composition, Quartz, in large angular grains, constitutes in general about one-half the rock. It shows numerous rehealed cracks but few inclusions. The feld- 2 “The acid extreme of the Cortlandt Series,’ Science, XXVIII, 575. 1908. 92 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES spar, which makes up perhaps two fifths, is generally orthoclase, with varying amounts of microcline and plagioclase. The extinction angles of the latter show it to be albite and oligoclase. In all of the sections examined, the feldspar was considerably altered to kaolin, this being much more striking than in the other members of the series. Epidote also occasionally forms in small amount through the feldspar. In the four thin sections of granite from the quarries, the alteration of the plagioclase was especially apparent, as was also the case in the rock from the drill core; in the surface specimens, however, the orthoclase seems to be the more kaolinized. Several cases of zonal alteration in orthoclase were noticed. Muscovite occurs in typical habit; the grains vary consid- erably in size but are seldom as large as the quartzes. It is altered only in the surface specimens; in these, it is hydrated and appears to yield damourite. It is usually much more abundant than the biotite. The latter is seldom entirely fresh and is often altered to chlorite. Horn- blende is rare, and when found is generally altered. Magnetite is pres- ent in very small quantity; apatite and zircon are practically lacking. In the diamond drill hole above referred to, which was sunk to 425 feet for water at a point half a mile east of Jacob’s Hill, the ordinary white granite was first encountered ; this changed gradually to a somewhat finer grained bluish gray-white granite carrying a larger percentage of quartz. Through this, several streaks of a basic hornblendic segregation, a foot or so across, were found. At several points, the granite is quarried as a building stone. The three cuts to the northeast are known as the Mohegan Quarry, the one to the south as the Peekskill or Cornell. The latter is the largest; from it was taken the rock out of which the bulk of the Cornell Dam across the Croton River was constructed. The granite from the Mohegan quarry is used as the chief building stone in the Cathedral of St. John the Divine, in New York City, which when completed will be the fourth church in size in the world. The stone has also been employed in several other edifices in the city. While the alteration of the granite is consider- able, as above described, it is not serious in character; and the rock com- mends itself on account of the paucity of the dark minerals. The altera- tion of the small amount of biotite has proceeded as far as it is likely to; the muscovite and orthoclase are fairly stable minerals; and the plagioclase is not abundant, while the large amount of quartz insures the rock against serious alteration. Pyrite and other notably deleterious constituents are entirely lacking. The rock is firm and easily worked, although the abundance of joints of all sizes militates against the ex- traction of large blocks. The actual amount of granite taken out varies, ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 93 of course, with the demand, but it probably greatly exceeds in value the emery mined to the south. Syenite. Syenite constitutes a member whose areal importance is small and whose existence even is not well defined. Three small patches were found, two on the borders and one in the interior of the district. The patch to the north lies between biotite norite and Manhattan schist, as does also the small area on the southern border; the interior patch is sur- rounded by hornblende norite. In all of these areas, the rock is heavy and dark gray, appearing much more basic than is actually the case. The rock in the northern patch is very fine grained and micaceous (biotitic), although the mica has no regular orientation. Some of the feldspar is evidently glassy oligoclase, while much of it is faintly pinkish. The thin section confirms these ob- servations; the feldspar is about half oligoclase, slightly kaolinized, and half orthoclase in larger and more irregular grains, somewhat more altered than the triclinic feldspar. Slight recrystallization and wavy ex- tinction are apparent. Several small grains of quartz, giving unmistaka- ble interference figures, and evidently original, are present. Biotite, typically developed, is practically the only dark mineral to be seen; green augite is present in very small quantity. Apatite is abundant in fairly large crystals, and ilmenite is present in small grains. In the southern patch, the rock is also fine grained, gray and mica- ceous. The specimen sectioned was taken from a small quarry at the juncture of the two roads and looks entirely fresh. In thin section, it resembles the rock described above, except that the orthoclase is much more abundant and that there is more quartz. The triclinic feldspar is oligoclase, as above. There is also a moderate amount of deep green hornblende and a little pyrite. The amount of alteration, however, is surprising: the feldspar is somewhat sericitized, and there is a moderate amount of chlorite and epidote and considerable calcite in small irregular patches. This rock is evidently much like the rest, although it is a more typical syenite. In the interior patch, the rock is similar to the other megascopically, except that there is less biotite. In thin section, it appears that the orthoclase is predominant over the oligoclase but that what quartz there is is secondary. Hornblende is the chief ferromagnesian mineral, but alteration to scaly chlorite, starting from the center of the crystal, is very common. The biotite is typical but somewhat altered and is usually found clustering around the hornblende laths. Pyrrhotite is present in small quantity and magnetite, ilmenite and apatite in moderate amount. 24. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The syenites are thus a fairly well distinguished group, although that of the northern area is related to the gabbros and that of the interior is almost a monzonite. It differs from them chiefly in the prominence of the orthoclase and in the considerable amount of apatite, this mineral being present in very small quantity in the typical Cortlandt monzonitie diorites. There is little of interest about this area, but the location of the other two between mica schist and biotite norite is very suggestive, taking into account the similarity between these two widely separated areas. A discussion of the possibilities of contact action must be reserved for another portion of this paper, but it may be noted here that if it be possible for the molten norite magma to act upon the mica schist to form a rock of normal igneous composition, this third rock would probably be approximately syenitic, both in chemistry and in mineralogy. No analysis of the syenite was made; but the analyses of biotite norite and of mica schist, given below,”* may be compared. Williams** suggested the same idea with reference to the gabbros, supposing that they always appeared between limestone and norite. His premises are not altogether correct, but the general idea can scarcely escape one who has worked on these rocks. Sodalite Syenite Sodalite syenite was found in only one place, and then in a very small place. It is interesting chiefly from a theoretical standpoint, as the only representative in the series of the feldspathoid group. Its field relations are somewhat peculiar. It is located at the north end of the road, imme- diately east of Lake Meahach, on the contact with the inclusion of quartz schist found at that place. Starting from the south, we have the sodalite syenite (whose exact extent is indeterminable, but probably small), then the schist, then a light colored augite monzonite in a strip about five feet across, following by schist again. This is cut about 20 feet farther by a much altered minette dike, three feet wide; beyond this the rock is largely covered, and the exact contact of the schist on the north is hid- den. It is thus impossible to say whether the sodalite syenite is a thin contact strip surrounding the schist or not, although it is certain that it does occur on the southern border. The significance of the augite mon- zonite is difficult to perceive; it is not a dike and is therefore probably a tongue of the country igneous rock projecting into the schist and partly altered by it. See pages 61 and 65. % Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 440. 1888. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 25 The sodalite syenite is a very fine grained black rock, in which biotite is the only mineral visible. It is somewhat brecciated and is considerably altered. Under the microscope, the biotite is seen to be subordinate in amount to a green hornblende, the crystals of which are often dislocated across the cleavage, leaving cracks filled with an isotropic substance. There is ‘little orthoclase, moderately altered, and no plagioclase. The sodalite is fairly abundant, and is typically developed, in rounded iso- tropic grains, n< 1.54. It has none of the structures of analcite, and the latter moreover could hardly form in so acid a rock and one in which the orthoclase is so slightly altered. Somewhat more abundant than the sodalite is a mineral which seems difficult of identification. It occurs in grains which are often hexagonal, having a relief of about 1.54 and a medium (second order) birefringence. It is biaxial positive. Its hex- agonal outline would suggest some derivative of nephelite, which would be expected in this association, but it is not cancrinite or any of the other common alteration products. Thomsonite usually occurs in a more fibrous form, although except for this, the characters correspond rather closely. The exact determination of this mineral, however, would hardly affect the name given the rock, which stands as another suggestive occur- rence of a zone on the border of the mica schist. Diorite The diorites are more important in the western part of the district, where they cover an area of about two miles. Since Dana and Williams worked chiefly in this section, the diorites appeared more important to them than they really are, for, except for this area, they appear only as small isolated patches. here is one at Pleasantside and another about half a mile southeast of that place; three along the southern border of the series, and a confused mass on Montrose Point. On Stony Point, across the river, they are found. There is also a garnetiferous phase a mile and a half east of Pleasantside associated with the emery; and dio- rites, often very micaceous, constitute the immediate wall rock in several of the emery cuttings on the hill just east-northeast of that village. As stated above, Williams subdivides the diorites entirely on the basis of their dark minerals, arriving thereby at brown and green hornblende diorites, mica-hornblende diorite and mica diorite. He states in this connection that the brown hornblende diorites tend to pass into norites and pyroxenites, while those with green hornblende show aspecial affin- ity for the mica-bearing rocks. These observations are quite correct ; there is every gradation from a diorite whose sole ferromagnesian mineral 26 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES is green hornblende, to one which carried biotite alone, and in the field, moreover, the two types are very intimately related. The whole of the large area of diorite is of this type, except in two places along the contact of the diorites with the pyroxenites, where the hornblende is brown, the rock carrying biotite as usual. All of the smaller areas of diorite carry green hornblende excepting two,—the patch just southeast of Pleasant- side, which appears to grade into the associated hornblende norite, and the northern part of the area southeast of Salt Hill, which appears to be closely associated with the neighboring biotite augite norite, both carry the brownish variety. This latter patch, however, shows green horn- blende along its southern margin. Willams’s conception of the affinities of these two main types, derived from the study of a small portion of the district, appears to hold therefore for the whole series. On Montrose Point, the brown hornblende is most plentiful, both in the hornblende pyroxenites shown on the map and in associated diorites which are not mapped. The extraordinary complexity of the rocks on Montrose Point makes the geology impossible of adequate representation, and it was deemed advisable, therefore, to map merely the most abundant rock, the pyroxenites. To quote from Williams:*° “These rocks (horn- blendites) have a glistering black color and are most intimately asso- ciated with the norites, hyperites, diorites and pyroxenites which also occur there. No more complicated interpenetration of eruptive rock- types could possibly be imagined than is displayed at this locality—every rock includes and forms dikes in every other; and at the same time, every . type passes by gradual changes in its mineralogical composition into every other one.” It is here, then, that the brown hornblende is best developed; and in this wonderfully complicated net-work of rocks, it grades on the one hand into a biotite augite norite and on the other into hornblendite and hornblende pyroxenite. In the latter rock, it is espe- cially well developed and often ar gieedanes basaltic hornblende in color, birefringence and relief. An attempt was made by the writer to classify the diorites on the basis of their feldspar, into monzonites and diorites. In most of the diorites, the unstriated feldspar constitutes from one third to two thirds of the whole. Williams states that on a number of tests made on the feldspar, however, the specific gravity ran from 2.648 to 2.67, which would show it to be plagioclase of the oligoclase-andesine series. Moreover, the re- casting of the subjoined analysis of diorite shows that all of the potash must be in the biotite, although the rock would be called a monzonite, 2 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 441. 1888 ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES OY if all of the unstriated feldspar were considered orthoclase. The peri- cline twinning is usually, of course, very faint, and much of the osten- sible orthoclase is probably plagioclase twinned according to this law. While this analysis shows an exceptionally low percentage of silica,?° it indicates that the identification of the orthoclase must be attended with great care and that a subdivision by this criterion would be very hazard- ous. At the same time, microperthite was noticed in one slide and quartz in another, so that orthoclase is probably often present. The diorites in the hand specimen vary greatly in appearance. They are generally of medium grain, although they vai,;.from almost felsitie to an extremely coarse rock at Crugers in which the »ornblendes are six inches long. The transitions in texture are very sudden, although there appears to be no concomitant change in composition. The feldspar is usually white, and the rock is then distinguishable in the field, but it is often a dark gray. The hornblendes are occasionally in slender laths, though usually in poorly defined grains. The microscopic features have already been largely covered. The characteristics of the feldspar have been noted; the plagioclase varies from oligoclase to andesine, although it may be labradorite when the rock carries hypersthene. ‘The hornblende is usually green with strong ple- ochroism: X olive green, Y brownish green, Z brownish yellow, though X may occasionally become bluish green. It is rarely in laths and never so when it is of the brown variety. The green variety especially often carries delicate parallel inclusions, presumably of ilmenite, which re- sembles somewhat the partings of diallage or enstatite. It alters to chlo- rite and epidote, and in one instance secondary biotite seemed to have been formed. The biotite is usually of a deep brown color, apparently high in iron and showing excellent pleochroism. It may be almost want- ing and may again almost replace the hornblende. In basal section, it is nearly opaque. The optical angle is extremely small. It is usually asso- ciated closely with the hornblende, and they appear to have been crystal- lized simultaneously. Epidote, apparently original, was found in one slide as figured by Williams.?7 Quartz is rare but occasionally occurs in small grains. Magnetite and ilmenite, this last usually the more abun- dant, occur in ordinary quantity, and pyrite and pyrrhotite are not rare. Apatite, while sometimes abundant in large crystals, is usually notably less than in the norites. Garnets are abundant in the locality noted above. 26 WILLIAMS (Op. cit., p. 444) states that an average of four silica determinations was 53.94 per cent. The particular rock analyzed by the writer is probably abnormally basie, although, under the microscope, it appeared quite typical. 2 Op. cit., p. 445. 98 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. The chief transition of the diorites is marked by the entrance of hyper- sthene and enstatite, which leads to the hornblende norites with the de- crease of biotite and to gabbro and biotite augite norite, with the entrance of augite. The latter, however, is rare, and in only a few of the diorites was either of these minerals noticed. In one case, an approach to a diabasic texture was observed, but this reversal of the normal order is uncommon. The alteration of the diorites is a very salient characteristic. Aside from the ordinary weathering to chlorite, kaolin and epidote, sericite was noticed in several specimens along the schist contact at the north end of Lake Meahach. In these rocks, moreover, and in those taken from simi- lar positions, a very perceptible amount of strain was noticed. The feld- spars showed pronounced mortar structure and wavy extinction, and the biotite was twisted and bent. The same phenomena are apparent in less development in most of the diorite slides examined; either because of their location, or on account of an inherent weakness in the rock itself, the metamorphism of this type is more evident than it is in the case of any other member of the series. Gabbro Gabbro is somewhat akin to the last mentioned type, but unlike the diorite it is areally unimportant. Only one important area was found, situated on the northern border just to the east of the syenite area there and lying between the biotite augite norite and the mica schist. Its posi- tion is thus analogous to that of the syenite, the accompanying norite here carrying augite, whereas that which adjoined the syenite carried merely biotite. Moreover, the syenite carries a small quantity of augite, which, with other characters emphasized below, would seem to indicate its close genetic relationship with this gabbro. The syenite and gabbro very pos- sibly adjoin ; but since no outcrops are available for a space of half a mile between them, it was deemed best to map them as found. The rock of this area is dark gray and micaceous, closely resembling the syenite, although the short stout augites may be distinguished on close examination. The grain is medium fine and the rock quite fresh, al- though well jointed. In thin section, it appears that the plagioclase is a basic andesine, but that nearly a third of the feldspar is unstriated and in rounded irregular grains, indicating orthoclase. The biotite is abundant and characteristic, with pleochroism from golden yellow to brownish black. The augite is green, non-pleochroic, and shows extinction angles from 45° to 50°. In basal section, it shows cleavages at 89° and gives a good positive axial bar. Only one grain of hypersthene is visible. Apa- ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 29 tite is not very abundant. Several small grains of what seemed to be quartz were seen. A small area of a very simple gabbro lies in the extreme southeastern corner of the district, where it is intimately associated with diorite and biotite augite norite. The gabbro phase is composed entirely of augite and feldspar. This rock, or more probably a mixture of the three, was used for the basement work of the Cornell Dam across the Croton River, but while the crushing strength was all that could be desired, the abun- dance of chloritized joints was found to affect seriously the value of the large blocks required, so that the engineers were finally forced to employ the granite described above. A large quarry, however, was opened, and most of it still remains above the level of the lake. Another type of gabbro is found, however, which is very different. It occurs in two localities adjoining schist inclusions; one at the north end of Lake Meahach and the other just west of Montrose. In the field, it closely resembles limestone, being gray and homogeneous in appearance and weathering in layers. Under the microscope, it appears that the rock is made up chiefly of two minerals, feldspar and augite. The latter is brownish but is non-pleochroic and otherwise typical. Biotite, apatite, ilmenite and titanite are present in small amount. The most extraordinary feature of the rock is the amount of shearing which it has undergone, which far exceeds anything noted elsewhere in the series. The augite is distributed in bands, in some of which the min- eral is actually granulated, and these surround “augen” of broken augite and feldspar. This lenticular effect is visible in the specimen, especially when polished. The whole rock resembles a badly crushed gneiss, rather than any of the other members of the Cortlandt Series, and it may pos- sibly represent one of the inclusions of Highland gneiss which are found elsewhere in the district. Since, however, it seems to be associated with the schist inclusion, it is probably a true igneous rock, from the strained and crushed zone which might be expected to border such a foreign mass, and movement of the latter just before the consolidation of the igneous rock may have contributed to this extraordinary crushing. Norite The norites are perhaps a trifle more abundant than any other group, although they do not, as Williams and Dana supposed, constitute the great bulk of the series. The general norite magma exhibits several facies, which are distinct rock types and which yet often pass into one another by insensible gradations. That the classification made upon a 30 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES petrographical basis is not academic is evidenced by the areal distribu- tion—the various types fall naturally into distinct areas. Their general distribution is suggestive, for although occasional isolated patches occur, practically the whole of the norite magma, in its various ramifications, is confined to the central part of the Cortlandt area, being flanked on the | west by diorites and pyroxenites and on the east by the latter. At the north and south, they are often separated from the mica schist by sye- nites, diorites and gabbro; and if the boundary could be accurately traced, it is very possible that these or similar rocks would be found continuously along the margin. . True norite, which is composed merely of hypersthene and feldspar, occupies a very peculiar position in the series. It does not appear on the map, since it never covers an appreciable area; it occurs always as inclu- sions in the other members of the norite family and generally, if not always, in those containing biotite. These inclusions are sometimes streaks and sometimes rounded flow-like patches, and this imparts a very peculiar appearance to the norites, especially in the northwestern corner of the area. The inclusions vary in size from a few inches to possibly forty or fifty feet across, though the smaller ones are the most common. Absolutely pure specimens are rare, inclusions in which augite and biotite appear in insignificant amount being the general thing. This pure norite is found frequently in the district between Spitzenberg Hill and Peeks- kill, especially along the post-road to the west; at Pleasantside again it is well developed, and striking cases were also found (see Plate IV, fig. 2) in the woods a mile south of Spitzenberg. It may occur anywhere in the biotite-bearing norites, however, and the above cases are merely a few examples. The rock is easy to distinguish in the field, since it is always fine grained. Its color is usually pale pink, owing to the amount of plagio- clase present, and scattered through this are the black hypersthenes. As the grain grows coarser, a little biotite and augite may enter, and the rock conceivably grades into the more complex and coarser norites. Under the microscope, it appears that the pink color of the plagioclase is due to the presence of a fine reddish dust, which Williams has figured and discussed at some length.?* Under a high power, this dust resolves itself into plates, rods and globulites, presumably of hematite. The plates may be hexagonal, rectangular or irregular, and they vary in size up to .01 by .04 mm. The rods are often arranged in rows, forming a kind of discontinuous needle, but these exhibit no parallelism to any 2 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXIII, 141. 1887. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 31 structure of the feldspar. The globulites are extremely small and are scattered promiscuously over the crystal, except at the border and on the margins of the larger inclusions (7. e., the rods and plates, or crystals of: magnetite) ; and this clear margin moreover varies directly as the size of the inclusion. This would indicate that they represent the form in which the iron of the rock first crystallized, many of them combining later to form the larger inclusions. The inclusions may be gray in color, then imparting a dark gray color to the feldspar, and they may be so plentiful that the mineral even in thin section is gray. They are de- scribed here at some length, because this reddish dust is very character- istic of the plagioclase in all of the norites and separates it sharply from that in the gabbros, diorites, syenites and granites. The feldspar in this rock is usually in a mosaic of small grains, the lamellz of the plagioclase occasionally showing strain. The variety is usually andesine, as deter- mined optically (angles 18°-20° on sections perpendicular to (010) and by specific gravity (2.674, according to Williams). The presence in con- siderable amount of orthoclase is attested by the analysis and by specific gravity determination, but the proportion varies greatly in different specimens. Carlsbad twinning and zonal growth have been noticed. A description of the hypersthene had best be reserved, since in the pure norite it is not altogether typical. The pleochroism is generally some- what fainter than usual, being from pink to light green. The crystals are usually small and arranged in clusters, and inclusions are few or wanting altogether. Magnetite and ilmenite are usually present in smaller amount than in the other norites. Apatite is fairly well devel- oped. Williams also mentions garnet and pleonaste in specimens collected at an emery cutting, but these minerals are associates of the ore and are usually not found elsewhere. A peculiar variety of this rock, in which the hypersthene has a rather remarkable habit, is found only at the emery mines and will be described below. Biotite Norite Biotite norite is one of the three more important members of the norite family, covering perhaps three and one-quarter square miles. It occurs in two large areas and at least three small ones. In the area back of Montrose Point, a number of small emery pits have been opened. This patch may possibly be connected with the larger one to the east of the railroad. One of the other areas is in biotite augite norite in the south central part of the district and the other in pyroxenite in the extreme eastern end. It is thus always associated with the other norites, as stated 32 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES A above, and shows particular relationship with the biotite augite variety. Williams records it from only one place (along the road to Montrose Point), which is so small an area that it cannot be mapped. In the hand specimen, the biotite is, of course, distinguishable, but these rocks cannot be told from those which carry also augite. The feldspar often imparts a dark pink color to the rock, but it is as often a dark gray. The grain is medium, being never very fine or very coarse. A faint gneissoid structure is occasionally apparent, but the rock is gen- erally quite massive. Under the microscope, the feldspar resembles that described under norite proper. The reddish dust is usually, but not always, visible. The andesine carries it most frequently; when the plagioclase becomes labra- dorite, the inclusions are more grayish. The lamelle are sometimes bent or broken by strain, and secondary twinning is also sometimes induced, but such a degree of metamorphism is rare. The orthoclase may be al- most entirely wanting, or it may again make up one third of the feldspar. It sometimes becomes quite gray from inclusions. The biotite is present in typical habit; it seems to be a somewhat less ferriferous variety than is characteristic of the diorites, and the axial angle is larger. Its pleochroism is X golden yellow, Y dark brown, Z brownish or greenish black. Rarely the colors are lighter than this. The biotite is an especially delicate indicator of the amount of strain which the rock has undergone, but, as stated above, any marked amount is rare. The hypersthene is, of course, the essential constituent of the whole norite group. It usually occurs in stout, rounded prisms, which are idio- morphic unless the ferromagnesian minerals are unduly crowded. In the finest grained rocks, the crystals are small and often clustered together, and even in the coarser varieties, the hypersthene is sometimes present in large aggregates of small irregular grains. Sometimes there is a ten- dency for the ends to fray out, as it were, and alteration then begins at this point. The depth of color and pleochroism vary directly with the amount of iron. Enstatite rarely occurs in the norites; bronzite, with a fains pleochroism, is more common; but hypersthene, of varying degrees of pleochroism, color and relief, is the typical orthorhombic pyroxene. X varies from deep red to reddish yellow or pink; Y from yellowish brown to dirty yellow or pale yellow, and Z from bright to pale green. Extinction is, of course, parallel. In basal section, it shows the charac- teristic crossed prismatic cleavages parallel to (110) ; the pleochroism is then rather faint, but the figure of the obtuse bisectrix distinguishes the mineral from monoclinic pyroxene. The fine parting of hypersthene parallel to (010) is usually well developed, and the characteristic ilmenite ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 33 inclusions are oriented with respect to this. These inclusions are prac- tically always visible with the high power objective, and they often be- come very large. They are usually reddish and are seldom opaque, al- though when abundant they may almost obscure the pleochroism of the mineral. By reflected light, they exhibit an excellent metallic luster, resembling that of phosphor-bronze. They are in many cases recti-tri- angular in shape, but sometimes four-sided and often irregular. Altera- tion of the hypersthene is fairly common, usually to bastite, which is then geometrically oriented on the altered pyroxene. Alteration may begin at the ends, or the bastite may be flecked over the surface of the erystal. Its color is yellowish green, and it practically lacks pleochroism. Uralite may occasionally form on the hypersthene; it is distinguished from the bastite by its pleochroism, deeper color and more fibrous habit. The opaque mineral in these rocks is chiefly ilmenite, in large irregular masses, magnetite being usually markedly subordinate. Pyrite is not uncommon, but pyrrhotite is rare. Apatite occurs in all quantities, usually in small, well defined rods, but sometimes in large crystals, sev- eral millimeters long. The crystals show a sharp hexagonal outline in cross section, with frequently a member of fine parallel rod-like inclu- sions—so fine in fact that they resemble the parting which is sometimes developed in corundum parallel (1011). The figure is the same in the two minerals, and the relief and birefringence seem to be higher in these apatites than usual. In one roek in which the identity of the mineral was doubtful, a test for phosphoric anhydride was made, but the high percentage (2.45) removed all suspicion of its being corundum. ‘This latter mineral was not noticed in any of the normal igneous rocks of the series. In several slides, hornblende (usually light brown) was present in sub- ordinate quantity, marking a passage to the biotite hornblende norites. Augite may also enter, to indicate the transitional phase to the biotite augite norites, but biotite norite appears to be a fairly constant type. Biotite Augite Norite (Hyperite) Biotite augite norite is the most important of all the norites, and from its central position it gives the impression of being the fundamental norite magma. There are three large areas, two of which are probably connected as mapped; two smaller ones, one on the west border and the other on the eastern, and a third located in the pyroxenite area. It also frequently occurs in the complex on Montrose Point, associated chiefly with the pyroxenites. Williams’s specimens are taken mostly from this 34 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES locality, although he mentions the western portions of both of the other areas. This rock closely resembles the biotite norites, being medium grained and either dark pink or dark gray. One or two light pink specimens have been taken, but this variety is uncommon. ‘The rock seldom shows any metamorphism. The feldspar is identical with that in the biotite norites, the orthoclase being present in about the same quantity. The plagioclase is usually andesine, but in one of the light pink specimens mentioned above, it was oligoclase, and when the rock is dark gray it may be labradorite. ‘The hypersthene and biotite occur as described under biotite norite. Green augite is the other essential mineral in this rock, and it appears to be closely related to the hypersthene. In shape, the crystals resemble each other strongly, and the augite often carries inclusions identical with those occurring in the hypersthene. These are clustered in the center of the crystal and are often so abundant as to render it dark reddish brown, but the margin usually is free and retains its clear green color. The color is about that of the Z ray of the orthorhombic variety. In many cases, an intimate intergrowth of augite and hypersthene was observed, a patch of pleochroic hypersthene appearing in an augite crystal, with the cleay- age and inclusions coincident. The augite may, of course, be distin- guished by its lack of pleochroism, its extinction angles of 40°-50°, its higher birefringence and its interference figure in basal section. Both simple and polysynthetic twinning were occasionally noticed in the same region, although these are both more common in the pyroxenites. Altera- tion is similar to that of the hypersthene, except that chlorite and horn- blende are the common products. The ferromagnesian minerals constitute in typical specimens from one-third to one-half the rock, but their mutual proportions vary consid- erably. The hypersthene makes up usually about one-half, with the bio- tite and augite in subecual amounts; frequently, however, these will ex- ceed the hypersthene in quantity. Original hornblende is rather rare. The apatite may become very abundant in this rock; in one case, the little rods were so plentiful in the orthoclase as to constitute one-third or more of its bulk. Ilmenite is much more abundant than magnetite, and pyrite and pyrrhotite are not uncommon. The order of crystallization of the ferromagnesian minerals is some- times hypersthene, augite and biotite, and sometimes hypersthene and augite, and then biotite. The orthoclase usually crystallizes last of all. Williams does not recognize this member as a distinct variety; he groups all of the augite norites together. That the subdivision is a rational one, ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 35 however, is indicated by its areal distribution; and, as remarked above, it seems to be at once the most common and the most resistant member of the norite family. It is itself a transition phase from biotite norite to augite norite; it rarely shows relations with other types. Quartz Norite The remarkable rock, quartz norite, was found in only one area, at the extreme southern point of the series, where it lies between biotite norite and mica schist. This and similar quartz-bearing rocks were also found in the emery mines, but the peculiar conditions which undoubtedly gov- erned the formation of these deposits tend to discredit the occurrence of such rocks over larger areas, and they will therefore be described in the economic section of this article. The patch in question might perhaps be relegated to the same category, as purely a contact development; but since there is no emery present, and since quartz is known to occur in other gabbros as a result of purely igneous”® action, it is thought best to notice it here. The rock in hand specimen is of a basic, micaceous, brownish gray ap- pearance. In the slide, the feldspar is seen to make up about one-third ‘of the rock, and about one fifth of it is unstriated. It is distinctly gray from inclusions and shows somewhat wavy extinction. In the case of the plagioclase, the twinning is often irregular. The quartz is present in ‘considerable quantity and appears to be undoubtedly original. It is in fairly large grains, which fill the interstices between the other minerals. It is often cracked, and these cracks are only occasionally rehealed. The hypersthene constitutes about one-quarter of the rock. Its color is deep and its pleochroism strong, and it carries numerous inclusions. It is altering to bastite and apparently to hornblende also, in places. Only a few grains of the typical green augite were noticed. The biotite makes up about one-quarter of the rock; it is typical and somewhat altered, so that it has a greenish tint. The hornblende is largely secondary, but one or two (deep green) pieces may be original. Apatite is abundant, and there is considerable ilmenite and pyrite. Chlorite, bastite, hornblende and kaolin are the alteration products. The rock has undergone a small amount of shearing, but the alteration is probably largely superficial. It appears to the writer that this rock is 2 J. P. IppiInGs, “Origin of Primary Quartz in Basalt,” Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 208. 1888. This paper deals with a somewhat different rock, but quartz norite itself has been described by TELLPR and vON JOHN, “‘Beitrage zur Kenntniss der dioritischen -Gesteine von Klausen in Siidtirol,’’ Jahrb. der k. k. geol. Reichsanstalt, XXXII, 589-684. 1882. 36 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES due to a reaction between the mica schist and the biotite norite, although it is, of course, impossible to explain why the same conditions should have given rise to the syenite to the west of it or the diorite to the east. That the quartz in the rock of this little border patch is entirely adventitious is quite improbable; its rather frequent occurrence in the rocks asso- ciated with the emery would indicate that certain peculiar conditions are requisite for its formation and that these conditions had been satis- fied here. Augite Norite Augite norite is a basic and comparatively unimportant facies of the biotite augite norite magma, having been found in two small patches on the borders of the latter area and as streaks in pyroxenite on Montrose Point. The smallest is at Montrose; the other, about half a mile east of Pleasantside. Its position would thus seem to indicate that it is merely a local segregation, derived by the loss of biotite. In the hand specimen, it resembles hornblende norite most closely, since there is no biotite. The rock is compact, dark gray and of medium grain. Under the microscope, there is little of note. In the patch at Montrose, there is a trace of biotite, while the augite and hypersthene are subequal in amount. There is a remarkable development of apatite in this rock, sharply crystallized in very large grains. In the rock from the other patch, there is no biotite; the hypersthene is somewhat less in amount than the augite, and both are characterized by such an abundance of inclusions as renders them almost opaque. Bastite, chlorite, epidote and kaolin are the well-developed alteration products. The streaks on Montrose Point are similar to the last, except that the plagioclase is more acid (approaching oligoclase) and the orthoclase abundant, being about one-third of the feldspar. The hypersthene is light in color and in pleochroism and is often in small elongated grains. The augite is in larger crystals, with numerous black inclusions, and there are a few grains of brown hornblende. Hornblende Norite Hornblende norite is the third important member of the norite group. The bulk of it occurs in the large area to the southwest of Pleasantside; the rest in a small patch half a mile to the southeast. The former is entirely surrounded by norites, while the latter is on the edge of the norite district. The rock in the hand specimen can usually be identified as a norite by the pink or (when altered) brownish color of the feldspar. The absence ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 37 of biotite in a norite may generally be taken to indicate this variety. The identification of the hornblende in the presence of hypersthene is difficult, owing to the peculiar luster of the latter on cleavages. Occa- sionally, however, the hornblende occurs in slender black rods, whose long axes are roughly parallel, when it is unmistakable. In thin section, the feldspar resembles that of the other norites. The plagioclase is usually a trifle more basic than in the others, being gener- ally either a basic andesine or a labradorite. In one case, microperthite was found, but in another, the plagioclase was almost bytownite. The orthoclase is perhaps less abundant in hornblende norite, though almost always present. The hypersthene is usually deep in color and pleochro- ism. The hornblende seldom resembles that of the diorites, being gener- ally coarser and of the brownish variety. The greenish tint, is usually present, however, though faint. The pleochroism is good: X dark brownish green, Y dark brown, and Z yellow, with the usual absorption formula. The alteration is to chlorite. Biotite and augite are not in- frequently present in relatively small amount. Apatite is often found in great abundance, size and perfection, and ilmenite is also common in large irregular masses. ‘Titanite is rarely present in moderate amounts. The order of crystallization exhibited in this rock is often peculiar. In many cases, the hypersthene, biotite, augite and even plagioclase seem to have preceded the amphibole, which then occurs in large irregular plates containing all of the other minerals excepting orthoclase. The structure then approaches the poikilitic, this term having been coined by Williams in fact to describe a similar feature in the hornblende of the hornblende pyroxenites of Stony Point.*° In other cases, the plagio- clases are outlined by irregular streaks of ilmenite, so that in two respects a somewhat extraordinary reversal seems to have taken place. From the frequent presence of augite and biotite in small amounts, the hornblende norite seems to have its most pronounced relationship with biotite augite norite. It is, however, most frequently in contact with this rock. A larger increment of biotite than is usually seen re. sults in the less common biotite hornblende norite. In the smaller area, however, it appears to grade into the diorite by loss of hypersthene, the variety of hornblende being the same in both rocks. Biotite Hornblende Norite An area of hornblende norite which carries biotite in addition, hes just southwest of Dickerson Hill. It may be placed in the same cate- %0 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXI, 30. 1886. 38 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES gory as the augite norite, both being derived by subordinate change from a much more important variety. The rock, however, is important as the connecting link between the norites and the diorites; it finds a further transitional phase in some of the latter, which carry hypersthene or enstatite. The rock is the customary dark gray and is of medium grain. The feldspar usually constitutes two thirds or more of the rock. It is chiefly labradorite, there being little unstriated feldspar present. The hypers- thene is a little more abundant than either the biotite or the hornblende. The latter mineral is of the brown variety. Apatite is generally abun- dant, and ilmenite is present in the ordinary amount and habit. Magne- tite and pyrite are not abundant. Olivine Augite Norite Olivine augite norite, which is the most basic of all the norites, has been found in only one small area, half a mile south of Pleasantside. It is situated on the border of the norite district, where it adjoins the pyroxenites. No olivine was noticed in them at this point, although it may be occasionally present. The rock is evidently a local basic segre- gation of the biotite norite member. The feldspar constitutes about three fourths of the rock and is almost entirely plagioclase, of the andesine-labradorite series. Of the dark minerals, green augite is somewhat the most abundant; it is occasionally intergrown with the hypersthene and always contains the olivine. The latter may be in large masses, or again it occurs in small grains. It is always strongly cracked, but it is less altered than would be expected. What alteration there is has formed chiefly antigorite; there is little separation of magnetite. This makes up about one fourth of the ferro- magnesian minerals, and the hypersthene, which has begun to alter to bastite, nearly one third. There is a little biotite, generally in small flakes. Ilmenite, magnetite and apatite are not abundant. Hornblendite Hornblendite is not common, being known in four small areas only. One is located at the northern end of Lake Meahach, another a mile south of Montrose; these are both in the main diorite area, and there is little question as to their derivation from the diorites by local segrega- tion, due to loss of feldspar. The others are in the pyroxenite district, located respectively about a mile east and half a mile west of Dickerson Hill. The latter appears to be an altered pyroxenite, the hornblende ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 39 having been derived by paramorphism from augite. In the former area, the coarse green hornblendes often contain patches of altered but still recognizable augite, and these are undoubtedly secondary; but some of the hornblende may well be original. If this be so, the primary rock was a hornblende pyroxenite. Finally, hornblendite occurs in the net- work on Montrose Point, apparently there also derived by paramorphism from pre-existing pyroxenites. These two modes of origin thus appear to have both been operative in the formation of the hornblendites. The rocks are easily recognizable in the hand specimen; they are usually medium coarse in grain and glistening black in color, with prac- tically no white minerals. In the rock of the first patch referred to (at Lake Meahach), there is a little feldspar present, less than one-fifth of the rock; a small proportion of it is unstriated. The hornblende consti- tutes the great bulk of the specimen; it is pleochroic from yellow to dark brownish green in some cases, while in others it is distinctly brown, with a very small extinction angle. These two varieties may occur to- gether in a single specimen. Sometimes the magnetite inclusions become so abundant, especially in the green variety, that all light is shut off ex- cept at the margin of the crystal. Hypersthene may be present in small amount and biotite in larger quantity. The grain of the rock in this area changes very suddenly from coarse to unusually fine. In the area south of Montrose, the rock is similar to the above. The hornblende is always brownish green, with extinction averaging about 20°. Biotite is a trifle more abundant and occurs as aggregates of crys- tals in the hornblende. Irregular masses of pyrite and pyrrhotite are common. Calcite has developed to some extent. In the more westerly of the two other areas, the rock is much the same, but the brown hornblende is apparently pseudomorphic after au- gite, and traces of the latter may still be seen. There is a moderate amount of biotite and several distinct alteration products, such as chlo- rite, calcite and quartz. There is no feldspar. The structure in the easternmost area has been described; the horn- blende is sometimes in large coarse green crystals, and sometimes in a confused lighter green mass, which is partly chlorite. The remnants of the augite may still be seen. The process of paramorphism is thus clearly indicated, and there can be no doubt that this is the common mode of origin of the hornblendites. In the two areas in the diorite, this is by no means impossible, since pyroxenite is apt to occur around inclusions in the main body of igneous rocks, and these two patches are both near inclusions. There is shown, however, in the writer’s suite of specimens from this district, a fairly 40 ANNALS NEW YORK ACAD#MY OF SCIENCES. complete gradation from a very feldspathic diorite to one in which the feldspar is distinctly subordinate to the ferromagnesian minerals; the hornblendites, moreover, resemble diorites in their sudden changes in grain, so that on the whole these two areas may best be regarded as basic segregations. Pyroxenite Pyroxenites form the most basic group found in the Cortlandt area, with the exception of an occasional specimen in which olivine runs over one-third and which may thus be classed as peridotite. Williams classifies all rocks containing olivine as peridotite and devotes the whole of his first paper to this group; most of them are considered by the present writer under the heading “Olivine Pyroxenite,” below. The hornblende pyrox- enites form a distinct group which Williams does not consider at all, per se. He merely mentions, moreover, the pyroxenites proper, which, as will be seen from the map, constitute nearly one-fourth of the whole series, and are thus the most important single rock type of all. They may be considered first. Under this head are included all those rocks which consist almost en- tirely of pyroxene, whether it be monoclinic or orthorhombic. As a matter of fact, nearly all of them contain both of these minerals, and only occasionally would there be any warrant for calling a-specimen augite rock or hypersthenite. Enstatite is quite common, moreover, and in one case what is probably hedenbergite was found, so that a multiplicity of names may be avoided by considering the pyroxenites as one group; and the field distribution seems to indicate that this is a rational procedure. The pyroxenites may be conveniently described under two heads, accord- ing as the color of the monoclinic pyroxene in thin section is pink or white, or green. White pyroxenite, in which the augite is a light pinkish or greenish white, is by far the commoner variety. It occurs as mapped on Montrose Point (although the numerous other rocks which interpenetrate there are not indicated) and constitutes the bulk of the large area to the east. The patches of pyroxenite at Buchanan and just west and south of Montrose are also of this variety,** and it was only in the first two of these that the pinkish augite was noticed. By the entrance of olivine, it becomes the olivine pyroxenite of the series; and it may be noted here that while the areas in which the olivine is segregated are probably fairly definite, they are at the same time probably not as well defined as depicted on the map. %. The “fine black rock’”’ which Dana describes as usually associated with the ‘limestone areas” is merely a fine pyroxenite. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 41 All of the important emery developments are located in the eastern pyroxenite area, although a local development of a more acid rock often constitutes the immediate wall rock. These rocks cannot be distinguished megascopically from those carrying small amounts of olivine, but their general identity as pyroxenites is at once apparent. When fairly fresh, they are dull black; upon moderate alteration, they assume, in many cases, a reddish brown color, and strangely enough when badly altered, they become gray and look like an entirely fresh rock. The reddish rock is common in the region around Salt and Dickerson Hills; the gray, farther to the east. They always retain their toughness, but the rock, especially when it contains olivine, will often disintegrate under the hammer, rather than break. That the rock is the most resistant in the series is evidenced by the fact that the two highest hills in the county (Dickerson and Salt Hills) are composed of it. Very perfect jointing is often developed in the pyroxenite. The grain varies greatly but is generally medium fine. In the district just west of Dickerson Hill, however, it becomes very coarse, containing crys- tals of hypersthene and diallage one inch or more long and frequently masses as large as one’s fist; and this coarse facies occurs in other places also. Under the microscope, it is seen that the bulk of the rock is generally made up of a light colored pyroxene, which is probably augite (fassaite). It is a uniform light greenish gray in color, with extinction of 42°-45° in the vertical zone (in diopside Zac= 38°). The alteration, moreover, is usually to antigorite or to brown hornblende or chlorite, so that too much FeO is indicated for a diopside. Furthermore, the analyses indi- cate a mineral carrying 2 to 4 per cent. Al,0,, so that it seems to be an augite. The mineral sometimes occurs in idiomorphic grains, but it is ordinarily in an entirely allotriomorphic condition. The grains are some- times clear and coarse, and sometimes exhibit the fine parting of diallage (generally parallel to 100) in great perfection. They often carry a notable amount of fine black rod-like inclusions, which are very different from the inclusions in the green augite of the norites, although occa- sionally the latter are found and constitute a typical diallage. Simple and polysynthetic twinning are common, and the latter especially reaches a high degree of perfection in these rocks. The other and much less common variety is similar in every respect excepting color; this is a light brownish pink, with very faint pleochroism. Its color is very pos- sibly due to TiO,, but the rock containing this mineral appears to be intimately associated with the normal variety. The alteration of the augite is almost always perceptible and often far advanced; the common 49 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES products being antigorite and brown hornblende, or more rarely chlorite. The light green antigorite forms in a confused fibrous mass over the original mineral, the alteration starting from the border of the crystal. The antigorite may form in considerable amount before the polarization of the augite is destroyed. The brown hornblende forms in sharply de- fined masses along the cleavage rocks, in strong contrast to the antigorite. Calcite and quartz are accessory products. The orthorhombic pyroxene in these rocks is less ferriferous than in the norites. Hypersthene in rather small rounded grains set in the augite, and less altered than that mineral, is nearly always present. Its color and pleochroism are usually not strong, however, and it grades into bronzite and enstatite by a loss of iron and a concomitant decrease in refringence and birefringence and in the optic angle about Z. These colorless varie- ties are difficult of distinction from the white augite in plane polarized light, but under crossed nicols, of course, the orthorhombic symmetry becomes evident. Like the augite, the enstatite is usually (but not al- ways) allotriomorphic. Fine parting is generally well developed, and the characteristic small inclusions, regularly arranged, are common. The rock is usually at least half made up of the augite, although the proportions of the monoclinic and orthorhombic pyroxenes vary greatly. Sometimes an almost pure enstatolite will be developed; pure augite rock is known, but hypersthenite is rare. The most common type consists of augite to the extent of from one half to two thirds, with hypersthene and enstatite—the latter usually the more abundant—for the other chief con- stituent. Hornblende in small quantity, and generally basaltic, is very common, especially in the Montrose Point area. Biotite is rarely present. Traces of feldspar, chiefly unstriated, are not uncommon. Apatite is practically absent. The chief ore is pyrrhotite; pyrite and chalcopyrite are less common; ilmenite and magnetite are always present, usually in small quantity, and chromite is known. Green pyroxenite was found in only one patch, where it adjoins and probably surrounds a limestone inclusion. It is located on the post-road between Montrose and Buchanan. The available outcrops were all very near the contact, the rock being greenish black and felsitic. Under the microscope, it appears that the great bulk of the rock is composed of an apple-green pyroxene in small crowded grains. The extinction angles run from 30°-38°. In basal section a somewhat eccentric bisectrix figure is obtained. The refringence is a trifle higher than usual in a pyroxenite, and the birefringence lower. Pleochroism is more distinct in some grains than in others, though it is nearly always visible; when most distinct X is pale brownish, Y pale green and Z apple green, or X may be pale green. ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 43 Some of the larger grains show almost colorless centers. The cleavage is always coarse, and there is little suggestion of a diallage parting ; in basal section, the cleavages intersect at 87°. p > v. It appears from these characters that the mineral is a member of the diopside series, probably salite or hedenbergite, or possibly (from the pleochroism) a lime dial- lage. Titanite is scattered through the rock rather plentifully in small wedge-shaped grains. Very small grains of what is probably wernerite are not uncommon, and there is a very little quartz. Opaque minerals are almost lacking. The peculiar combination of minerals in this rock indicates that its relation with the associated limestone is very close. All of them, except the very small amount of quartz, are lime minerals, and all of them may be contact minerals. There is little doubt that the rock represents a clear case of contact between limestone and probably diorite; and similar, though entirely abnormal, mixtures are not uncommon in the district and will be described below. Hornblende Pyroxenite Pyroxenites containing sufficient amounts of hornblende to place them in this class are most common on Montrose Point, although two other small areas exist: one just south of Salt Hill, and the other two miles north of the first. Williams describes this class only in their peridotitic phase ; they are then most abundant on Stony Point, though known in the extreme eastern end of the main area. The hornblende pyroxenites have originated in all the cases examined by local increase of hornblende in the typical pyroxenite described above, although conceivably a partial para- morphism of the pyroxene would give rise to a similar rock. These rocks cannot be distinguished in the field unless, as is often the case, the hornblende occurs in very large individuals with the other min- erals imbedded in it. This is the type development of the poikilitic struc- ture which led Williams to coin the term. The hornblendes may reach three or four inches in width, and their glistening black surfaces, inter- rupted by small included grains, is an unmistakable feature. On Mon- trose Point, however, this structure is often lacking entirely, the horn- blende having crystallized simultaneously with the other minerals. Under the microscope, the proportions of the various minerals are seen to vary considerably, according to the degree of completeness which the segregation of hornblende has attained. The typical greenish gray augite is always present and may constitute as much as two thirds of the rock. Hypersthene, often in the beautifully pleochroic clear rounded grains, 44 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and enstatite are present as stated under pyroxenite. Small amounts of olivine may be present, but if at all important the rock is classified as olivine pyroxenite. Calcite, quartz, chlorite, antigorite and hornblende may occur as alteration products; and in one more acid variety, contain- ing some feldspar, zoisite was found, typically developed. The horn- blende is the essential constituent in this class, making up from one third to two thirds of the rock, and yet it seems to differ in the various patches. . It is usually of the basaltic variety, rich brown in color, and pleochroic from dark to light brown. The refringence and birefringence are higher than in the green variety, and the extinction angle is smaller. It is this variety that usually gives rise to the poikilitic structure; it seems gen- erally to have crystallized last. In one specimen, the hornblende was apparently basaltic but had become a pale brown, and the crystals were often decolorized in the center. Again it may be of the coarse greenish brown variety which is characteristic of the hornblende norites, so that the hornblende pyroxenites do not seem to be a very well defined member of the series. Olivine Pyroxenite Olivine pyroxenite forms the last class of any importance; rocks in which the olivine runs over one third and which are then classed as perido- tites, are rare. They seem to occur, moreover, in the centers of the areas of olivine pyroxenite; and since they merely mark the culmination of the segregational process which has led to the formation of these areas, it was thought unnecessary to differentiate them on the map. As stated above, the areas occupied by the chrysolitic rocks are rather vaguely defined, and owing to the difficulty of distinguishing these rocks in the field, their extent on the map is only as close an approximation as could be attained by collecting and sectioning a large number of specimens. The weathering of the olivine rocks is beautifully shown in the two eastern areas. The decay of the olivine causes a disintegration of the rock into a coarse red sand, whose fragments are the grains of augite and hypersthene. This is much prized as road metal, and it is used exten- sively through the eastern part of the district. It is in effect a fine, re- sistant, homogeneous gravel, found ready crushed and sifted, and is excel- lent as a road covering. It is not, however, of like benefit to the farmer, being too ferriferous to be fertile. On the hills, it favors especially a peculiar flora, with an abundance of such trees as cedar and hemlock. The topography of this region is rather striking, there being numerous rounded hillocks, whose shapes are due to the melting away of the rock masses which compose them. These ledges when artificially exposed show ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 45 their peculiar softened shape, with rounded masses often projecting high above the general level of the rock. This is well shown at Chase Corners, just northwest of Dickerson Hill, as pictured in Plate III, fig. 1; the effect is rather striking, when it is recalled that the other rocks of the series are usually found planed smooth by glacial action. As above stated, these rocks resemble in general aspect the pyroxenites, although closer examination may reveal the small yellowish green grains of olivine. It is only in thin section, however, that the rock may be ac- curately studied. The proportions of augite (usually the gray variety, but occasionally the pink), enstatite and hypersthene vary as recorded under the pyroxenites; almost pure olivine-augite rocks and olivine- hypersthenites are known. MHornblende, usually basaltic, is a fairly con- stant component, though it seldom occurs in important amount. The olivine is present in amounts varying from one-fifth to one-third of the rock. It occurs in typical grains, usually rounded, but sometimes ex- hibiting a distinct crystal outline. Usually besides these large grains (which may reach 3 mm. in size), there are numerous little ones scattered throughout the augite. The mineral is colorless but often carries magne- tite inclusions in the form of minute rods; this feature is, however, better developed in the peridotites of Stony Point. The alteration is exhibited in all stages. Sometimes the mineral is nearly all serpentinized, with only occasional little bullets of olivine remaining, while again it may be almost perfectly fresh, even when strongly cracked, and when the augite shows distinct alteration. The characteristic mesh structure is always developed on alteration. The product is, of course, serpentine. Antig- orite is the most common variety, chrysotile is somewhat more rare and bowlingite less frequent. Magnetite separates out in varying quantity. According to Williams, whenever the mineral comes in contact with feld- spar a diopside-actinolite reaction-rim is formed, such as he has figured ;** but feldspar has not been found in contact with the olivine in the rocks of the main area, so that this effect is not a common one. A similar phenomenon, between olivine and biotite, is described and figured below. Peridotite Peridotites are merely exceptionally basic phases of the rock last de- scribed; and their relations to that type have already been discussed. They do not differ in any respect except the proportion of olivine; this mineral, however, in several cases constituted about three fifths of the rock, and in one instance was almost unaltered, though badly cracked. % Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXI, 35. 1886. 46 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES . These cases were all found in the two eastern areas, although less pro- nounced ones occur in the Montrose Point district. All of these rocks would be classed by Williams as augite peridotites (picrites) which he thought occurred in the highest development on Montrose Point. He describes at considerable length another group from Stony Point, how- ever, which is.not typically represented in the main area—the hornblende peridotites. The nearest approach to these rocks is to be found in the hornblende pyroxenite area on the south side of Montrose Point; but these contain olivine to the extent of more than one-third only exception- ally. Oddly enough, however, Williams, who, after all, studied only a small part of the whole area, felt that they were so important a member of the Cortlandt Series that he proposed the name “Cortlandtite” for them, and rocks consisting of olivine and hornblende are now widely known by this name. A rather extraordinary rock, some- what analogous to the so-called cort- landite, does, however, occur in a small patch on the extreme eastern edge of the series. This in the hand specimen exhibits the poikilitic structure par excellence, but biotite, instead of hornblende, is the host. This occurs in individuals often sey- eral inches across (although by rea- son of the abundance of the included minerals, it makes up somewhat less than one-third of the rock), and under the microscope it is extraor- dinary for the abundance of its inclusions. These are of a sharp, brownish black substance, probably magnetite, and are so abundant in the center of the grain as to render it opaque, but the periphery and a margin around each included olivine is entirely clear. On the extreme edge of the biotite in the latter case, however, there is a narrow band of magnetite grains, and surrounding, or nearly surrounding, the olivine is a wider zone of pale green pyroxene in rectangular blocks (fig. 1). This appears to be a reaction rim, although the pyroxene zone is not entirely universal. Basaltic hornblende, without inclusions, is fairly abundant, and hypersthene and enstatite make up nearly one-third of the rock. The olivine is also present in about this amount; white augite is almost lacking. Alteration is apparent, but is not severe. As the culmination of the basic development along this line, we have Fig.1. Poikilitic Relation of Biotite and Olivine in Peridotite. Sl. 166 ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 47 several occurrences of serpentine. These are probably generally, if not always, dikes and they will be described under that head. They always occur in the pyroxenite area, however, and may represent local segrega- tions of olivine. They would thus once have been dunites, since only serpentine, showing mesh-structure, is contained in them. If they are genetically related to the peridotites, however, it is difficult to under- stand their complete alteration; and while their field relations cannot be definitely established, they may be provisionally considered as dikes. DIKE ROCKS Dikes are fairly common through the district and are usually small ; and the following list is therefore probably by no means complete. Aside from those within the area itself, an excellent development of chiefly basic varieties occurs on Verplanck Point, where the dikes ramify into the limestone and schist. The abundance of pegmatite dikes in the north- ern part of the district has already been remarked. The complex of rocks on Montrose Point, in which, as Williams says, “each rock includes and forms dikes in every other” is interpreted as a case of true differentiation, rather than as a network of dikes; and the rocks have therefore been considered above. A careful study of the dikes of the series with regard to their mutual time relations would probably be of great value in indi- cating the relations of the plutonic types; for if the dikes had followed the laws which govern their successive differentiation in other districts, it might be inferred that the plutonics had done the same. A plite The aplite dikes are usually small and not especially common. They occur chiefly north of Pleasantside. They are, of course, fme grained and consist of muscovite, orthoclase and quartz, with small amounts of plagio- clase and biotite and with zircon and magnetite as the common acces- sories. They are, perhaps, slightly more acidic than the granites, but their composition does not differ greatly from the latter. Pegmatite Pegmatite is probably the most common dike rock of all. It was no- ticed especially in narrow veins or dikes in many of the more northerly emery cuttings. The pegmatitic structure is generally well developed, and the component minerals are as usual. The largest and most striking occurrence of the rock appears about 200 feet south of Montrose station, 48 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES where a large irregular mass outcrops on the west side of the railroad. Its relations are rather obscure, and its size if fully exposed would prob- ably be about 60 to 80 feet, but there can be little doubt as to its identity as a dike. Occasional blotches of a fine grained gray substance are in- cluded in it. The true pegmatitic structure is not well shown, this name being applied because of the coarseness of its texture. About 30 feet to the south lies one of the schist inclusions described below; between the two the country rock (biotite augite norite) is altered to a diorite, some- what gneissoid, but this is probably due to the schist rather than the pegmatite. Dacite Porphyry The very remarkable rock, dacite porphyry, is known from only one locality, viz., about 300 feet up the hill east of Montrose station. It out- crops in the gutter of the road for about ten feet (though it may be traced for 75 feet), and this outcrop is about three feet wide. By differential weathering, it projects about three feet above the ground, and its jointing and its white color, combined with its odd position, cause it to look at a glance exactly like a stone wall. In thin section, the rock is seen to be composed of a moderate number of large idiomorphic feldspars set in a mosaic of quartz and feldspar grains. The phenocrysts are almost never striated, but Williams** states that all of the feldspar of the rock has a specific gravity of 2.63-2.67, so that it must be oligoclase and andesine. The phenocrysts never show resorption, but usually exhibit beautiful zonal growth. The quartz is all in the groundmass, and some of the small feldspars are striated and seem to be oligoclase. Biotite, hornblende and muscovite, some of the latter probably damourite, but not all, occur in rather small quantity. In the groundmass, the grains often appear to be interlocked, as though the rock were a kind of augen gneiss, but the perfect outlines of the phenocrysts and the distribution of the muscovite, as well as the field relations, preclude this. Dioritic and Gabbroic Dikes Various types of the dioritic lamprophyres constitute by far the most common group of dike rocks. They are especially abundant on Verplanck Point, although found quite abundantly elsewhere, especially through the southern part of the district. The different types, of course, exhibit no preference for any particular plutonic rock. Only in the limestone on 83 WILLIAMS Calls this rock a bed of porphyritic quartz mica diorite, (Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXV, 446. 1888.) and Dana a granitoid micaceous quartzite (Idem, XX, 218). ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 49 Verplanck Point was any contact metamorphism observed: here the dikes are gabbroic (camptonite), and cause the formation of diopside, actino- lite or hornblende and pleonaste in the limestone. Only occasionally is a typical minette, vogesite or kersantite found; usually the orthoclase and plagioclase, and the biotite and hornblende, are subequal in amount, Green augite has been found only in the dikes on Verplanck Point, where they radiate into the limestone; these, however, are typical camptonites. Furthermore, there is seldom any serious alteration, such as is described by Rosenbusch in the type lamprophyres, although this is a less essential feature. Minette has not been found typically developed: the usual variety is a basic one and might almost as well be called either of the following. Vogesite is quite typically developed in a number of places; the orthoclase constitutes two thirds or more of the feldspar, and horn- blende, which is usually greenish brown, though sometimes green, is dis- tinctly predominant over the biotite. Augite, however, has been seldom found in them. Kersantites, though not typical, are found abundantly on Verplanck Point, and also on Montrose and Stony Points. They are merely fine grained mica diorites with considerable hornblende. Camp- tonite occurs on Verplanck Point, as stated above. The classification of these rocks according to Rosenbusch is thus a difficult matter, and they had best, perhaps, be regarded as dioritic and gabbroic dikes. Hornblendite Only two dikes of hornblendite were found, one on Verplanck Point, in limestone, and the other in one of the emery pits on the hill east of Pleasantside, in diorite. In both cases, the rock was composed almost entirely of bright green hornblende, with a very subordinate amount of biotite. Apatite, which is ever-present in the diorite dikes, is practically lacking. Serpentine (Peridotite) Three outcrops of serpentine (peridotite) were found, one two miles east of Montrose, another four, and the third about half a mile farther. The first is in hornblende norite; the others in olivine pyroxenite. The first and last are undoubtedly dikes, the former three feet wide and the latter about ten feet. The second outcrops on an old log road southeast of Dickerson Hill, and its relations cannot be definitely determined. If a dike, it must be at least twenty feet wide. In all three cases, the rock is greenish black, fairly soft and strongly jointed. In the first case, the structure of the serpentine is hard to work out. There are traces of 50 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES typical mesh-structure, though most of it has neither the antigorite nor the bastite habit. It most resembles the former, however, and a hypers- thenite dike so completely altered would be a curiosity. There is also a small amount of sericite, quartz and biotite. In the other cases, the typical antigorite or mesh-structure, indicating the former presence of olivine, permeates the whole rock. Traces of altered white augite are still visible; but the rock was evidently almost entirely olivine. In all three cases, a considerable amount of magnetite is present. ABNORMAL CONTACT ROCKS The true igneous character of the series is proved by the frequent presence of contact action. This usually occurs along its borders, but several very peculiar and abnormal developments are to be found within the area itself which can only be explained by considering them as due to the contact action on the inclusions which are fairly common in the western part of the area. Williams* has given such a minute description of what seems to be the characteristic type of border contact action that it would be superfluous to describe in detail the work which the writer has done along the same line. The general result seems always to be that the mica schist increases in alumina content as the massive rocks are approached; and this is attended by the formation of such aluminous minerals as staurolite, sillimanite, cyanite and garnet. A very striking feature, and one whose importance will be emphasized later, is the great increase in the amount of biotite, which at a point ten yards from the contact at Crugers consti- tutes the bulk of the schist; and magnetite is thickly scattered through the mica. Contained in the diorite itself at this point are numerous small schist inclusions, and these in like manner furnish excellent opportunity for the study of contact action. They are largely changed to pleonaste and corundum in some cases; in others to quartz; in others to staurolite and green mica. The first case resembles the emery from the mines very closely. Along the limestone contact, which exists only on Stony Point and at Verplanck, contact action of a different kind has taken place. The com- mon minerals developed are usually pale green amphibole and pyroxene ; more rarely titanite, zoisite and scapolite are formed (these last were observed on Stony Point). Similar effects have been recorded by Kemp from the Rosetown area,** where the limestone contact is especially well shown. % Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 254. 1888. = Op. cit., p. 252. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 51 The writer has observed several other instances, however, which would seem to merit description. The pale-green pyroxenite recorded above, . occurring on the border of a limestone inclusion, is undoubtedly a contact facies, and may be recalled in this connection. Wernerite Schist Wernerite schist is found in a small patch at the cross-roads on Mon- trose Point, lying in the pyroxenite area. It has been only partly ex- posed by the excavation of an old clay pit at this point, but it probably is not more than several hundred feet long, extending northeast. In the field, it is distinctly gneissoid in appearance, the black bands being very distinct. It is very tough and has been planed off into a series of roches moutonnées, so that it is hard to sample. Under the microscope, it is seen to be made up of scapolite, pyroxene, titanite, calcite and pyrite. The scapolite seems to be wernerite, and the appended analysis as recast indicates that it is Me, Ma,, which is a very calcareous wernerite. The mineral gives conclusive tests. It makes up almost three fifths of the rock. Associated with it is the calcite, which is very subordinate in amount. The pyroxene is similar to that found in the green pyroxenite described above, except that the grains are less crowded and have a pris- matic shape. They are regularly aligned, and impart the gneissoid ap- pearance to the rock. The pyrite and titanite are very variable in amount, occasionally becoming quite abundant. Since all of these minerals have been observed on the limestone contacts, there is little doubt that this patch represents an entirely absorbed inclusion of limestone. It is pos- sible, of course, that the limestone is still present, though concealed, but the rock described exists over a zone 75 feet wide, at least. Lying between this rock and the pyroxenites, in several places at least, a typical diorite is to be found. On Verplanck Point, just west of the brick yards, and about 200 feet from the schist contact, a pyroxenite exists whose peculiarities might be taken to indicate a similar history. The rock is very hard and black, although in thin section a surprising amount of alteration is revealed. There is considerable pinkish augite in the rock, which appears to have altered largely to a greenish hornblende. Wernerite is present to the extent of nearly one third,-in large and small grains.** Calcite is less abundant, and in part at least, it is derived from the augite. There are also biotite, apatite and plagioclase in small amounts. Although no limestone is visible near this rock, the wernerite would point to an in- cluded patch which had been partly or wholly absorbed. 36. C, CALKINS (Science, XXIX, 946. 1909.) notes the occurrence of “primary” sscapolite in igneous rock, but also concludes that it is due to the absorption of limestone. 52 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Garnet Rocks On the southern border of the district, along the road at the foot of Salt Hill, is found a contact facies of very interesting composition. The outcrops are badly cracked and jointed, and the rock is friable and stained brown along these cracks. When fresh, two varieties may be distin- guished, one pink and the other an ash gray, these two occurring within 30 yards of each other. The former variety is of about the color of rhodonite; it is fine grained, but is thickly penetrated by flat gray tremolite rods. Under the micro- scope the pink mineral, which makes up more than half the rock, is seen to be garnet. It is practically colorless and always isotropic and is prob- ably grossularite. The tremolite*’ is typical and constitutes nearly one third, and quartz makes up the rest. Rutile, in small sharp grains, with very high relief and birefringence, and a deep yellow color, is quite com- mon. This rock is thus probably derived from an impure limestone, or possibly a calcareous schist, and presents an interesting contrast to the wernerite rock. The abundance of titanic oxide present is a curious feature in the contact metamorphism of the limestones; either as ilmen- ite, titanite or rutile, it appears to be always present, whereas iron and alumina are more typical in the case of the mica schists. The gray rock in thin section is resolved chiefly into quartz and garnet. The latter is identical with that in the last, except in its color in mass. The most interesting and suggestive thing about this rock is the presence in rather small amount of both corundum and pleonaste; and magnetite is, moreover, thickly scattered over the slide. Notwithstanding its pro- pinquity to the previous phase, the aluminous character of its components seem to indicate derivation from a mica schist rather than a calcareous rock. The very abnormal developments which are associated with the emery. may or may not be contact rocks; they had best be described, therefore, in conjunction with the emery. INCLUSIONS Inclusions** of schist (and occasionally of limestone and gneiss) have been alluded to frequently in the previous pages; they are quite abundant 37 KHMP mentions an analogous rock from the border of the Rosetown extension, com- posed entirely of tremolite (Op. cit., p. 252.). 88 Accidental xenoliths of this kind are of wide occurrence in other igneous districts. They have been exhaustively studied by Lacroix, ‘‘Les Enclaves Des Roches Volcan- iques,’”’ 1893. The tendency of intruded rocks to carry them is discussed in “Geology of the Castle Mountain Mining District, Montana,” Bull. U.S. G.S.,139. 1896. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 53 in the district and are of especial interest from the standpoint of contact action. They were first noticed by Dana, who mapped*® several of the larger limestone areas in the western part of the district. They appear to be most frequent in this area; in the region around Salt Hill they occur less commonly. In the main diorite area, however, they are much more numerous than is indicated on the map; there are many, especially near Crugers, that are too small to be shown; and near Salt Hill, they are too small and their relations too obscure for adequate representation on the map. Dana maps three inclusions of limestone in the large diorite area, and all of these have been found by the writer to be a very quartzose schist, closely resembling limestone in appearance, but nevertheless of an entirely different composition. Hither Dana, who was looking for limestone, mistook its identity on account of its peculiar appearance, or else it does contain calcareous layers which he happened to find and which the writer overlooked; but it is certain that it is essentially a quartz schist. It weathers in layers, however, which also tends to give it the appearance of limestone. It appears to be chiefly quartz in most places, with some feldspar and traces of muscovite; but it occasionally contains layers which are entirely similar to the Manhattan schist. It is usually considerably decomposed. In one case, it resembled a very fine gneiss, but other parts of the same inclusion were normal, and it was moreover very similar to an outcrop of schist on Broadway, the straight road running north from Verplanck. An outcrop of the schist (see map) is to be seen on the post- road, a short distance below Montrose, and the cliff behind Mackey’s store at Buchanan contains two stringers of this rock imbedded in a somewhat gneissoid diorite, which to the west becomes pyroxenite (Plate IIT, fig. 2). The inclusions are generally associated with rocks which show more or less evidence of metamorphism. This is so apparent that these rocks were first interpreted by the writer as parts of the schistose inclusions themselves, but their peripheral position would seem to indicate that they are true igneous rocks which have undergone some shearing; and this is borne out by the composition, which is that of a mica diorite. The strongly crushed gabbro is also found on the border of two of these in- clusions. The abnormal mineralogy of the schist is peculiar, although there is little doubt that it is Manhattan schist. The mica has evidently been largely altered or absorbed by the igneous rocks, leaving a very quartzose residue ; and it would seem, therefore, that these inclusions may thus en- % Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 195. 1880. A minute description of a number of inclu- sions is here given. 54 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES rich the surrounding magma in certain constituents, such as alumina. It will be recalled that the numerous small schist inclusions—at Crugers, for example—are also distinctly altered, but often in exactly the opposite direction, so that magnetite, corundum, biotite, etc., are developed. Only one inclusion of limestone was found, which was either over- looked by Dana or else its position on his rough map is not accurate. It occurs along the post-road a short distance above Montrose, and on the north the contact with the green pyroxenite described above is visible. It is about seven hundred feet wide and is a medium grained, thoroughly crystallized patch of the white Inwood limestone. The wernerite schist described above may be mentioned in this connection, since its characters would indicate that it is a thoroughly worked-over inclusion of limestone. A single inclusion of a rock which appears to be undoubtedly a basal Highland gneiss was found. It is located on the shore of Lent’s Cove, and it seems to be only about seventy feet wide and of a slightly greater length. It is almost entirely feldspar, which is very strongly kaolinized, but which seems to be albite. There are also streaks of chlorite in the rock; and the whole has a decidedly gneissoid aspect. It could not be a dike or a member of the Cortlandt Series; it is probably a xenolith of an ancient gneiss, although it might also be thought that the igneous rocks are thin over this area and that this outcrop represents a projection of the gneiss which underlies the series. STRUCTURAL GEOLOGY There is little that might be called structural geology that has not been already discussed. Jointing usually occurs in these rocks, but always in moderate development. The weathering of the olivine pyroxenites has been noticed above, and the only other features of note may be now briefly considered. DYNAMIC METAMORPHISM The amount of shearing undergone by the Cortlandt Series is, as has been shown, slight but constant. It appears to vary somewhat among the different members. The granites, although they carry microcline, show strain in general to a very small degree: It is only occasionally that the norites exhibit any trace of the mortar structure, bent plagioclase lamelle, wavy extinction, and twisted biotite that characterize the most metamorphosed types. In but one or two instances was any crushing seen in the pyroxenites. In the diorites and gabbros, however, the case is different. The former group, as remarked above, shows perceptibly more strain than is to be ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 55 found in the granites, norites or pyroxenites, although at the same time it is not severe and is apparent in the hand specimen only in exceptional cases. The gabbros in two cases show a rémarkable degree of crushing, such as would be characteristic of an augen gneiss, and such as was de- scribed by Lehman*® in the “Flaser Gabbros” of Saxony. Both of these cases, however, occur directly on the border of an inclu- sion; and those of the diorites which show a gneissoid structure are simi- larly located. Williams has described the crushing which is apparent in some of the types found in the “Butler Section”; it is here also very severe microscopically, but this section is located 150 yards west of the inclusion which runs northwest from near Montrose. In many of these instances, it is easy to take the strike and dip, but the cases of straining which were noticed elsewhere were relatively insignificant. It would thus seem to appear that dynamic metamorphism is usually or always confined to the borders of foreign inclusions; and if the district had undergone any amount of regional pressure, it would naturally be concentrated along the lines of weakness which would develop on the contact. This is the only explanation that would seem to account for such a localization of metamorphic effects. It may be noted in this connection that dynamic action is also very perceptible at most of the emery developments in the district; it is evi- denced not only by microscopic and megascopic shearing, but by faulting and veining. ORIGINAL GNEISSOID STRUCTURE Dana** describes in some detail a structure which the present writer believes to be of an original gneissoid character. As already stated, on Montrose Point, in particular, several very different kinds of rocks are associated in the most intricate way, often as successive bands ;*? and Dana cites one case in which biotite augite norite and olivine pyroxenite are found in alternate layers of constant grain only three or four inches wide. There are many other cases of less pronounced character, which are referred to by both Dana and Williams (e. g., the Butler Section) and which have been seen by the writer. In another instance, a streak of the coarse dark pink norite was seen in a cliff of the black pyroxenite ; the norite was coarser, if anything, than the latter, and was coarse, more- over, to its very edge, having thus none of the characteristics of a dike. The analyses of these types show their great chemical differences. 40 Uber die Entsthehung der altkrystallinen Schiefergesteine, p.190. Bonn, 1884. “1 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 211 et seg. 1880. 42 WILLIAMS refers to these as “‘dikes,’’ but Dana evidently recognized that they were not of this character. 56 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES In the norite family, however, this structure is commonest and best developed. As remarked above, it seems to be a general rule that the finer grained a norite is, the simpler it is, 1. e., a very fine-grained norite is composed chiefly of feldspar with considerable hypersthene, while the coarser varieties carry in addition either hornblende, or biotite and augite. The fine-grained simple norite is never found in large areas, but always as inclusions in the coarser, and therefore more complex varieties. It often occurs in biotite norite, for example, as small, rounded flow-like patches, or again as streaks; or it may be banded with the coarser rock. In this case, the chemical difference is not so great, as the accompanying analyses show. Now, if the simpler norite be not quite so fine grained, it will not be entirely pure; and this is the case in most places. In Plate IV, fig. 1, the mass of the rock is a biotite augite norite, while the white streak is merely a finer and therefore simpler facies, containing only small amounts of biotite and augite. In one place, it shows an included patch of the coarser rock. The ledge shown is about 20 feet high. Plate IV, fig. 2, shows the same thing in better development, so that the rock might easily be mistaken for a real metamorphic gneiss. A number of other equally good instances might be shown, for the structure is quite common; but these suffice to show its general aspect.* From what has been said above, it is evident that this structure cannot be due to ordinary shearing, and we are therefore obliged to search for another explanation. Eliminating Dana’s idea of worked-over volcanic ashes, and Williams? 8 suggestion of the ordinary regional metamorphism of igneous rocks, we are thrown back on some force concomitant in its action with the cooling of the rock. Since the several layers or streaks are always quite different in mineralogical composition at least and more or less so in chemical, it is evidently a question of magmatic differentiation. It is inconceivable that the structure be due to the differentiation of a magma in situ—after it had reached its present position—since the differentiation is into bands which bear no definite relation to the borders of the magma; and the idea of successive intrusions—first of a light band and then of a dark—is equally inapplicable, since even when there is a sharp line of demarcation # The classic locality for this structure is on the Isle of Skye, in Tertiary gabbro, where it was first described as such by GIEKIE and TEALL. (Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., I, 646. 1894.) It has also been described in wonderful development by A. G. HédcsBom, from the Island of Orné, just south of Stockholm. (‘Zur Petrographie von Orné Huf- yvud,” Bull. of the Geol. Instit. of Upsala, X, 150.) F. D. ADAms has noted a striking development of the structure near Montreal, which he will describe in a forthcoming paper. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 57 separating two bands, the individual grains seem to interlock across the line. The only remaining hypothesis, therefore, is that of the intrusion of a molten mass already heterogeneous. Harker** appears to favor the view that the structure is due to the approximately simultaneous intrusion of two different magmas, which would give rise to an interpenetration of the two. This would account for the banded structure, which always shows evidence of flowage and is seldom straight and clear cut. The assumption would be then, of course, that the mass would soon begin to cool and harden while resting quietly, as otherwise the two magmas might combine to form a third and homo- geneous one. Harker’s alternative view is that the mass was intruded as a unit, already heterogeneous, the two different magmas having been partly mixed before intrusion. Whichever be the correct theory, it is evi- dent that in the Cortlandt Series the simple norite magma was very small in comparison with the more complex norite magmas, since the former is always as included bands in the others, while these latter cover con- siderable areas. RELATIONS OF THE TYPES, WITH ANALYSES From the above description of the more salient characters of the Cort- landt Series, it appears that we have in it a fairly complete and very intricate complex, one susceptible 4nd worthy of the most detailed study. In some places—e. g., Montrose and Stony Points—the complexity of the mass is bewildering, while again we may have several miles of a fairly uniform rock. At times, as shown in the original gneissoid structure, the contacts are sharp and clear, although never showing contact metamor- phism on each other, while again numerous cases have been noticed of one rock grading into another. Thus, for example, the biotite norite area at Lent’s Cove grades into the biotite augite norite to the south by a perfect series of steps; similarly the augite norite at Montrose. Diorite becomes hornblendite, and pyroxenite becomes chrysolitic, by imper- ceptible gradations. Moreover, the different larger groups are similarly connected ; the diorite just southeast of Pleasantside grades into the ad- joining hornblende norite, and norite passes into olivine pyroxenite by way of olivine norite. An infinite number of species might be differen- tiated within this small area of twenty-five miles; in this paper only the unavoidable ones have been mentioned. The accompanying diagram (fig. 2), greatly modified from Williams, is designed to show in a rough way the relations of the species. The lines connecting the circles indi- cate the direction in which gradation has been most frequently observed. “ Natural History of Igneous Rocks, pp. 138 and 341. New York, 1909. 58 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The variation diagram of the series (fig. 3) indicates a rather complex relationship. The pyroxenites alone, however, are responsible for the sharp curves; if they be disregarded, the variation curves of the several oxides will be smooth and simple. This would seem to indicate that the differentiation which led to the formation of the pyroxenites was of a Norite Fig. 2. Diagram of the Relations of the more important Types of the Cort- landt Series peculiar character: that either they are derived directly from some other type, as the norites, or else that the primal parent magma underwent great changes between the times of intrusion of the pyroxenites and the other rocks. An effort has been made to indicate under each type, in a general way, some of the more suggestive points which the map brings out. Thus the granites appear to have little connection with the main body, except as ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 59 they all belong to the same series. The norites occupy a central position in the area, being flanked by diorite and pyroxenite, and often, at least, protected on the north and south by more acid rocks. The biotite augite norite magma is the largest and is closely connected with the norite proper and the biotite norite; while the hornblende norite shows closer affinities with the diorites. The pyroxenites comprise the eastern third of the series, and possibly likewise extend to the west, since they are found on As BCODEFG’ HI K Fig. 3. Variation Diagram of the Cortlandt Series A=Diorite; B=MHornblende Norite; C=Biotite Norite; D= Olivine Pyroxenite; E=—= Pyroxenite; F=—Biotite Augite Norite; G—=Norite; H= Gabbro; I= Augite Norite; K—Granite. (The rocks of the New Jersey and Connecticut extensions of the series are not included.) Montrose Point and again across the river, on Stony Point. They be- come chrysolitic in apparently irregular patches. Finally, the diorites occupy an area to the west which contains most of the inclusions of the district ; and in several places where there is reason to believe that inclu- sions have existed but have been absorbed, diorite is also found. Gabbro is found in two cases next to the limestone, and in two others adjoining schist, while syenite is in an analogous location. The problem suggested by the location of these last rocks is a difficult one to solve. According to Harker,** the hybrid formed by the absorption 45 Jour. Geol., VIII, 389-399. 1900. Also Nat. Hist. of Ign. Rocks, Chap. XIV. 1909. 60 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES of a sediment by an igneous rock is always of abnormal composition and constricted extent and is usually marked by such minerals as sillimanite, cordierite and wollastonite. By variation diagrams he proves that such a commingling would give rise to rocks whose composition might be pre- dicted and which would not even approximate any known igneous flow. In the Cortlandt Series, we have this latter type well developed in the instances described; whether a normal igneous rock, such as syenite and gabbro, may be formed, despite Harker’s arguments, is a question requir- ing more data. The rocks in question must be analyzed, and the variation diagrams constructed for them and for the surrounding magmas, before anything can be definitely said. It is interesting in this connection, how- ever, to recall Daly’s*® theory of overhead stoping, which postulates exten- sive assimilation of the blocks which drop into a magma as it ascends. He has further developed this idea of abyssal assimilation,’ until it re- sembles the marginal assimilation hypothesis which is supported by many French geologists.** If something of this kind has actually taken place in the Cortlandt Series, it is probably a fairly common process, since it has suggested itself in many parts of the world.*® On the other hand, of course, the location of these rocks may be merely an accident of intrusion. Little can be said regarding the mutual relations of the four funda- mental magmas, since they are not yet sufficiently clear. The volcanic phase, the first in the normal cycle of igneous activity, is wanting. The normal order of intrusions in the plutonic phase is that of decreasing basicity, and this seems to have been followed in the Cortlandt. As al- ready stated, the granites seem to have been intruded last, both from the evidence of the acid dikes in the more basic rocks and from their almost isolated position. The pyroxenites and norites, from their intimate rela- tion in several places, were probably formed at about the same time, although not simultaneously, for their association is only local. The pyroxenites probably preceded the slightly more acid norites but had not haidened when the latter appeared. At the same time, however, the evi- dence of the variation diagram, as indicating a much more complex rela- tionship, must not be lost sight of. The diorites were probably still later. Here again, however, we are confronted by the suggestion of hybridism in the occurrence of gradation from hornblende norite into diorite, for ex- ample, and a further discussion of these problems would be fruitless in view of the comparative scantiness of our data. «6“'The Mechanics of Igneous Intrusion,’ Amer. Jour. Sci., (4), XV, 269, and XVI, 107. 1903. Also “The Geology of Ascutney Mountain, Vt.,’’ Bull. 209, U.S.G.S. 1903. 47 Amer. Jour. Sci. (4), XXII, p. 195. 1906. 8 See for example ‘Contribution 4 l’etude du granite de Flamanville,” Bull. carte géol. France. 18938. See M. WepeER, k. Bayerischen Akad. der Wissenschaften, Dec., 1910. ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES —_ . Granite. He OO bo . Gabbro, Rocks, 1908, p. 72, No. 3. Symbol, IT. . Norite proper, 14 miles S. of Peekskill. . Granite, Cornell Dam Quarry. municated by C. P. Berkey. Magmatic symbol, I. ANALYSES. Mohegan Quarry. Idem. S. E. of Salt Hill. 5. 3.4. tonnatHtox Pee its: jeu Ce we le Wy [voo) > i 4 ; atid 2 iii ita i i iaNndiisdtin s Sy ee ee ee re ke ONS deme omy eh ccpmian TS. Sieh toe teelte . C1 bX ONWayialien Gia 80) sO OT i Os 0m 96 N He Ar ee ee ib be SS iais kb e ere tan ae re eee Kd eles 6 Me wee he ba, «808 ee) ote AN SMe perimlleNeioy 6G 6 o oO ¢ ; is Neon Ne OE et oe le a at — AYO a bmn ae ea ee ee — POON (HOM CAMHMO 7 ttl: . rk ©1090 CO =H re ai eS le iochage f= Sar) fon eae a eee otk CN heientoy Cer Wohi 2 OU oe on 6 : YAaNCeyes we) UNiGlive | 2 6 Oo 0 9 0 85 o> N oO fad eee ei ele (6 ere pee Ay 8 haw Bie BEV CN ISN SSCA RE Be ae Ue Gn amet yor a0 2 ONAIGD +00 Natl ie De OMA I nA GPRIOMG [o a) CA Of . . . . : . R : . renee eet ast aie Rene eae ee “LEE so . s . 5 . s ~~ “ops S5as ca B8aauss SROBQHAS EE TEAS QEOgS ele cates kmwabe coach ss OAdaeHt qtOdes ea nosed Pyrite... Norms. 13. 12. er ee oe 8, a ers Swe Ow oN Vi Chit metre SC ON A Ge Oe Ch ed Ce) mec A OC, Be Re, et PO ahr ni 6! 0) els ee aye Ve ee Ue BO eC, i) aT cre Ok dhe th SPC eT othe OMe a welaser ep ene) te) we cemuce Wipe tes yee Xen Wet tevs Ne! 67 fe IE 10. rH AIDOMN OR 1 Ve) N NO NODDODAOMH : rio of CLO a) OMmLnn Lees Cuma) Th. Oe CRS DF OP Os oO mie <6) Xe Ne) ee pe = seve Vel nec fel ee FL Oa: AP te emai maa oS We te. ale! Me OS Pe) Monee s Se bev Cette oe Vem th ety gh Ske tv pee, wt Ge ee A phpee> ee Ce Ciba) UCase bat Condber Sel se, 6). el w re 6 Gg i QO wren Cie Dine 0, See Se Om Ora: 64 14. Spinel Emery, high grade, Buckbee Mine. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. 15. Pure Emery, Dalton Mine. 16. Feldspathic Emery, Salt Hill. 17. Quartz Emery Schist, Salt Hill. 18. Emery. Analyst, T. Egleston. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES p. 197 (No. 1). 19. Idem (No. 4). 20. Idem (No. 7). Analyst, G. 8. Rogers. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. G. H. Williams, A. J.S. (3), XXX@IE 14, 15. 16. 18. 19! 20. SiOn sere ia $8454, 10.60") ) AVG As a sal cet 25 elle ee SA Ose we 68.14 59.22 43.72 31.93 37.43 46.53 IRONS Ge oco- 1.438 16.66 13.75 18.19 Al aily/ 32.31 INS OG sooar 16.25 14.02 LOAM, S2AO} es wisstetamia ltr ee ercinreel| ste coeaeete any Fe ORE Pc = 10.02 3.54 8.59 7.41 7.20 9.43 CaQy. iaks~e trace trace MOB 4") “2iOB Gace aie Sales om dae eile ee eae NacOP a trace trace BOO Sie oe ROD Weve erst aeral|'s, caste een a fisre eeee Ow snese trace trace Be | dO ll ieee tas aleee ae nese eee H,O+ 1.15 2.65 SBD = TW ental ee as ltes cates hee eee RO snaee SiR .05 S07 NE ALO) ates Set aky sad ricio celts RI Ok Beer 1.41 3.28 1.43 Wel .65 ol LENO} dao 06r trace trace trace trace trace trace Site cere 05 .06 .07 .04 .02 01 Cr Ogee ace 04 trace AG ¥) ~ ¢ GEACE Tie is.:5 5 sic, |lneets 2 oie MnO cee trace .06 SUE a LOS eee REP es 5 occ Magnetic =o Sian a eres Perea, 3 ER 34.200 | 19.81 | 8.98 Siliceous Bee aoe [eet wa tae Sem, A 6.42 | 1314 | 2.42 SUE eel ee 100.54 100.38 100.51 99.31 99.42 | 100.19 Moves 14. 15. 16. Oize 1.9 8 3.9 36.7 Orie eles tote several emer cike eee 2.8 Ee) SAN DIG See Sale aye ene aielllo ake sexta tate 4.7 4.7 PAGVOTUI: S52) sralete craters sivas eocers Be) 10.0 | SOUT CET 8) RAS acl iaeioenc [es aon'5 9 5 4.9 | Spinel ..... 75.0 Dili 61.3 24.3 Corundum.. 19.5 45.2 9 5.0 MiGic cus Dal pA ON 8.8 | Ilmenite... 2.6 6.2 2.6 2.8 51 Probably derived in considerable part from the agate mortar. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 65 21. Brown Norite, Buckbee Mine. Analyst, G.S. Rogers. Symbol, IV. 11. 1’. 2. Cookose. 22. Sillimanite Schist, Dalton Mine. Analyst, G. S. Rogers. 23. Manhattan Schist. Composite analysis of five specimens from various points beyond the borders of the series. Analyst, G. 8. Rogers. 24. Manhattan Schist (least altered), Crugers. Analyst, F. L. Nason. G. H. Williams (3), XXXVI, p. 259. 25. Manhattan Schist (nearer contact), Crugers. Idem. 26. Manhattan Schist (about 750 feet from contact), Crugers. Idem. 27. Manhattan Schist (on contact), Crugers. Idem. Pel. pe 23. 24, 25. 26. PA SION Rasa: 52.27 28.81 57.94 62.98 61.57 55.12 40.16 aN Og efi s 3 6.81 46.95 21.70 16.88 19.53 24.32 29.50 He Owes ae 2.48 10.00 1.57 2.48 5.44 6.13 19.66 IRON Sooaee 10.01 7.40 5.90 5.00 2.61 4.99 5.80 MeO-...3 2: 23.29 2.08 2.49 1.58 1.90 trace trace CAO Sa sch: 2.04 trace .08 trace trace trace .85 Ine Oana 87 50) 1.74 3.02 3.48 Zeal 1.46 Ke Ope a 25 sath 4.68 7.45 2.14 2.83 1.36 EOS oe 5s 61 .64 OL ThA Ss Buren dka rane tall cera a ea cee es ore Reco H,O— 14 .07 BAD [tsps oh < ee ee eneh| es feeo aya ver rele ose av oreonl [ioe a mens CORE eres 13 none TENG Sica lites ct seers cx cvl | atens\ ny esenerli mcr eoe te suki | el ears aaa ERY OR ers ores 40 2.76 TCD Fe ae a 1.53 ZAG Es ee lea Or deere trace none trace trace trace trace trace Sata icteis eve 05 SOFA sll here recite .08 85 1223 .82 CRO, aac 2 22 Eilers crete Hs. S/d Mel tee uthee We allen re to Aes ake etonan WhiOwog sues trace .29 ola ee eee ee te al leks a Protein (arbre ener IIe ra Ges. c Sule ee 99.57 100.06 100.26 99.47 99.05 99.79 99.61 Mopes. Bille i. 2B} GZ ae cece a | ses Sarena iovel| atershst tts 61 19.2 @Ortheenen HTL 52 0.6 IN SiKE so co oe ies 6.3 14.7 Anorth INE Sia | eetaa wreteye 2.5 Whoa ssllogosde gaclonenede cs 38.5 BIOUILERE al eee atertote al eeterencvekons 14.9 Bronzite... USVEP No eran Oo. | SRDS ee Cordieriters|acer ae sc ZS) cea Sillimanite:|2...-...< Sica)” | Roxane Corundunga eee 15} ae ene 1 ie eer 3.5 14.4 sft Ilmenite... 8 5.1 1.9 66 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES GEOLOGY OF THE EMERY Emery has been mined in this district for the last twenty-two years; and at a previous period, an attempt had been made to use it as an iron ore, but being so high in alumina, when used by itself, it of course hope- lessly clogged the furnace which was erected, and the undertaking was abandoned. Since 1889, however, many thousand tons have been taken out for use as an abrasive, although the so-called Peekskill emery is the poorest variety on the market. Isaac McCoy was the first to mine emery, and on his land, on the central and southern part of the hill east nortiveast of Pleasantside, is the most pretentious mine in the district. He worked in a small way himself for a while and then leased the property to the Tanite Emery Company of Stroudsburg, Pa., who kept twelve or fifteen men busy at intervals for about eighteen years. The Blue Corundum Mining Company of Boston, Mass., has also done work on his property. The Keystone Emery Com- pany of Frankfort, Pa., started work a little later on the Oscar Dalton property (on the northeast slope of the hill above mentioned) and on the land of John H. Buckbee, which is located on a hill a mile southeast of the last. The work here was later taken over by H. M. Quinn of Phila- delphia, Pa. The Tanite Company also leased the land of David Chase, just southwest of Mr. Buckbee’s property. The work done on the deposits which are found on Dickerson and Salt Hills is mostly of a private nature, although the Lombard mine was once quite productive; and the same applies to the small pits which are located in the biotite norite area north- west of Crugers. The work on the emery deposits has been so scattered and irregular that no estimate of the total amount mined can be made. Work is at present going on in the Dalton pits, in a new cut at the McCoy mine (Plate V, fig. 1) and in the southeastern area. A thousand tons or more are lying in the pile at the Dalton property and an equal amount in the emery yard at the Chase mine. The ore is hauled by teams to Peekskill and is thence shipped chiefly to Easton, Pa., as the market demands. Most of the mining is of a very primitive nature, being chiefly open cutting and stripping; after a small amount of work has been done, the emery usually pinches out. It occurs chiefly in veins and pockets but at the Buckbee mine in fairly well-developed lenses. Here more extensive mining was carried on; tunnels were driven in several places, and a small . shaft was sunk, but the timbering has given way, and the whole work has caved in. At the McCoy mine, the largest pit is about 75 feet long by 40 feet wide and is 80 feet deep. The work here was stopped partly on ac- ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 67 count of the water, which fills the pit to a depth of about 30 feet. Just at this level, two adits have been run, at either end of the pit; one of these opens a 30-foot pocket of emery, the other merely runs out on the side of the hill. A derrick was used to raise the ore, which was run down to the road on cars. This was the only place at which an attempt was made to use a steam drill, and it proved a nuisance. The usual method consists of enlarging the cracks in the ore by hand drilling, shaking it up with dynamite and extracting it with pick and bar. Williams was the only geologist to discuss the emery in any detail; Dana*’ only briefly mentions it, since in his time it had not been mined except for iron. He notes the thin magnetite beds in diorite on Crugers Point, which Williams has shown to be merely metamorphosed inclusions of schist,®* and states that the ore is chloritic, whereas Williams®* has shown in his discussion of the emery that the green mineral is pleonaste. The latter, in his first description, states that the veins are segregations in the norite. He describes the ore from a microscopical standpoint, mentioning the various minerals which the present writer describes below ; and gives seven analyses of the emery, partly chemical and partly physical, but makes no mention of the localities from which the specimens were taken, or what varieties they were, etc. In his paper on contact meta- morphism, however, he abandons his former view. To quote: “The isolated inclusions (7. ¢., the metamorphosed schist inclusions at Crugers) “of spinel and corundum are almost identical with the more extensive de- posits of the same character occurring near the southern border of the norite region farther to the east and described at length in a former paper. Their origin in both cases is without doubt essentially the same.” It is somewhat unfortunate that his previous view, based on fewer ‘observations, should have found its way into the literature. J. H. Pratt®* gives a condensed account of Dana’s work and of Wil- liams’s work on the norites and evidently relies largely on the latter for his statement that the emery is probably due to segregation in the norite along the borders of the magma, in a fashion analogous to that of pyrrho- tite, etc. The fact which sustains this view is given as the “gradual transition of the spinel, iron ore and emery into the normal norite’—a fact observed by Williams. He does not appear to have consulted Wil- liams’s other papers; but from the description of the series given above, 52 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX, 199-200. 1880. 68 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XXXVI, 261 et seg. 1888. 54 Amer. Jour. Sci., (3), XX XIII, 194-199. 1887. 5 Loc. cit. 58 Corundum and its Occurrence and Distribution in the United States, Bull. 269, U. S. ‘G. S., pp. 41, 93 and 137. 1906. 68 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES it is evident that no broad deductions can safely be made from the study of one member, aside from the fact that in only one place does the ore occur in a norite area. F. W. Clarke®* quotes Williams as regarding the ore as a segregation, as does also J. F. Kemp.°* Lagorio,®°*® however, refers to the deposits as in contacts, although his reference is to Wil- liams’s first paper. PETROGRAPHY OF THE EMERY AND ASSOCIATED ROCKS Perhaps the description of the several types of occurrence may be facilitated if the ore and some of the rocks peculiar to the mines are considered first. Spinel Emery In the hand specimen, spinel emery is a heavy black fine grained aggre- gate, with dark gray crystals of corundum appearing in the best varieties ; sometimes the corundum is pink (approaching ruby) and sometimes blue (approaching sapphire). Un- less these crystals are large, however, the amount of the mineral present cannot be distinguished. ‘The emery often has an excellent fracture and closely resembles the Turkish emery. In thin section, it is seen to consist of an aggregate of pleonaste, corun- dum and magnetite. The pleonaste, except in the highest grade of ore, constitutes the bulk of the rock. It Fig. 4. Relations of Spinel, Corundum 1S 10 rich green grains of irregular and Magnetite in Emery. Sl. 326 — shape, closely crowded. They are, of course, isotropic and have a high in- dex of refraction, though the surface appears smooth. They often carry magnetite inclusions in the form of very fine parallel rods. The corundum is present in all amounts; it may constitute half the specimen, or it may be lacking entirely. The grains, which may occasionally reach an inch in size, are in this variety colorless in thin section. They exhibit a prismatic shape, which is usually quite sharp and apparently always crystallize before the spinel. They are always strongly cracked and are often con- 57 Data of Geochemistry, Bull. 330, U.S. G.S., p. 278. 1908. 58 Ore Deposits of the U. S. and Canada, pp. 61 and 173. 1906. 5° Zeit. Kryst. Mineral, vol. 24, p. 288. 1894-95. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 69 siderably altered to a hydrated mica (damourite or margarite), so that their double refraction is destroyed. They give the usual tests. The magnetite is in somewhat smaller grains scattered among the spinels, and it is usually not nearly so abundant. It seems to have crystallized simul- taneously with the corundum (fig. 4). Williams mentions an analysis of the spinel “whose results were unfor- tunately lost,” but from the fact that the analyst remembered that the MgO ran only about 9 per cent., he concluded that the mineral closely approached the ferrous aluminate, hercynite. In the analyses (Nos. 14 and 16) of the emery, made by the writer and given above, the spinel was chemically separated from the magnetite and ilmenite, and the analysis of the mineral as recast gave the following results: (14) (16) INOW spico pbc po0do A OOCUOOOOED ED ODIO COaOOS 64.86 65.19 INXD) 6.650ib000000 00 bo CORO COO ME RCO aE OO ODIOES 21.78 20.78 WIE) pcecedaccos0o cos DObOOUOOUOboeoGnd50 DO 13.36 14.03 From the analyses of pleonaste given in Dana’s Mineralogy, there appears to be no reason for doubting that the spinel in question is of this variety, and not a hercynite. Pure Emery Pure emery, which has a peculiar reddish black tint, is rare. It has the fracture and other characteristics of the other variety, but no corun- dum can be distinguished. In thin section, however, it appears that corundum is the chief constituent. It occurs in small square grains which contain reddish brown inclusions in great abundance. These may com- pletely fill the center of the crystal, or they may form a ring, as is often observed in leucite. They are probably ilmenite. The corundum is badly altered in this rock, as shown by the high percentage (2.65) of water in the subjoined analysis. The magnetite constitutes about one third of the rock. Spinel rarely occurs; biotite has been noticed in small amount. Feldspathic Emery Feldspathic emery resembles the spinel variety when well developed ; and a surprising amount of feldspar may be present without being no- ticeable in the hand specimen. Streaks of almost pure magnetite may occur in this ore, which was the one formerly mined for iron. In thin section, the plagioclase is seen to make up from one third to one half of the rock. It is usually basic, though not always. The corundum is scat- 70 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES tered through the rock, usually associated with the more basic minerals ; it is generally of the typical colorless variety, occurring in medium-sized idiomorphic crystals. In ore from certain places, however, the corundum is deep bluish green in color, resembling glaucophane, with strong pleo- chroism: E light greenish yellow, and O dark greenish blue. It then occurs in stouter crystals, with less distinct outline. Once recognized as corundum, it is always unmistakable. Spinel is typical and abundant, as is also magnetite. Sillimanite, in long blades and in a confused fibrous mass (fibrolite), is often present. Quartz-Emery Schist Quartz-emery schist is most closely associated with the last variety, which grades into it; it is also, however, found in the spinel emery mines. It is usually consigned to the dump as too poor in emery. Quartz streaks run through it in great abundance and give it a distinctly gneissoid ap- pearance, and it was this resemblance to a schist or gneiss which first suggested (to Dr. Berkey and the writer independently) that it might possibly be an altered inclusion. This texture is brought out to a certain degree in the accompanying photograph of a typical hand specimen (Plate V, fig. 2). It is much like the feldspathic emery under the micro- scope, differing chiefly in the abundance of quartz. This is in large inter- locking grains, and it may compose one third or more of the rock. It sometimes carries an abundance of rutile inclusions in sharp yellowish needles. The corundum in this rock is often of the peculiar variety de- scribed under the last; and the rock may (at the Buckbee mine for ex- ample) become very sillimanitic. Besides these distinct varieties of ore, corundum or spinel, or both, may occur in the wall rocks, such as diorite, norite, etc. In these rocks, the corundum is usually in more irregular crystals, and the common colorless variety may show pleochroic blotches of an ultramarine blue. Norite Proper While norite proper must bear the same name as that given the more widely spread variety, it is in reality a somewhat different rock. In the hand specimen, it usually is of a soft brownish color, being apparently composed of enstatite and feldspar, with the former generally in excess. The rock is perfectly massive. In thin section, the dark mineral is seen to be orthorhombic pyroxene of a peculiar type. It is usually more or less idiomorphic, occurring in rounded oblong crystals, a habit not seen in typical norite. The pleochroism is weak (X yellowish pink, Z grayish ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES ral green), giving the mineral a curious washed-out appearance. The analysis shows it to contain 11.5 per cent. of FeO, so that it is bronzite. It may become very abundant, so that the rock is almost a bronzitite, which was never noticed in the typical norite proper; and magnetite, moreover, is almost lacking. The writer has three slides containing the contact of this rock with spinel emery. In every case, the feldspar is continuous over the line; in two the spinel and magnetite are sharply segregated from the norite, while in the other the minerals mingle for the space of about 1 mm. The feldspar of the emery is somewhat serictized, and its amount is surprising, considering the black heavy aspect of the ore. In one of the slides, a line of spinels diverged from the main mass and ran out over the norite, crossing the bronzites indiscriminately. Sillimanitte Schist Sillimanite schist is usually light gray in the specimen and of a fine, somewhat fibrous texture. The blades of sillimanite, however, can gen- erally be distinguished, and they sometimes reach one half an inch in _ Cordierite length, or rarely an inch or more. This rock is extremely tough and so hard that it will turn a drill at times. The “ore” from the Dalton property and from the latest cutting of the McCoy mine is largely this rock, al- though it is a poor abrasive, powder- ing when ground.®® Under the mi- croscope in typical cases, it is seen to be made up chiefly of sillimanite. This is largely fibrolite, with the blades scattered more or less abun- Fig. 5. Sillimanite Schist. Sl. 304 dantly through it. These latter are blotched with a fine brown dust in places, and they also carry abundant magnetite inclusions. Cordierite is almost always present in varying amount; its biaxial figure and the strongly pleochroic yellow halos which surround its inclusions serve to distinguish it from quartz. Allanite, in large brownish prismatic crystals, is often present. It shows parallel extinction and good pleochroism from yellowish brown to greenish brown, but the color, pleochroism and birefringence often vary even in one Sillimanite 4 60 Mr. John H. Buckbee rather aptly characterized this rock to the writer as being from a practical standpoint, “like gristle-—neither bone nor meat.” ire ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES crystal. Corundum, in any of the three varieties, may be present, and garnet (almandite) has been observed. Quartz was found in one instance. Magnetite and ilmenite are usually abundant. In the rock just described, the important minerals are of a peculiar type, but the relation of this abnormal schist to true igneous rocks is indi- cated by the fact that it often contains hornblende, biotite, hypersthene and even feldspar, chiefly orthoclase. In fact, a pure sillimanite schist is more rare than one containing a little biotite or hornblende, and in two cases a hornblende pyroxenite was found which carried merely subordi- nate amounts of the sillimanite and its associates. Other rocks are found associated with the ore, such as quartz gabbro, etc., which have not been before considered, but their peculiarities’ are indicated by the names given. The statement that shearing is often apparent at the mines may be recalled in this connection; in several cases the wiiter mistook for mica schist rocks which appeared under the microscope to be diorite and norite, and the schistosity was so striking that he was led to record the dip and strike. Faulting has also often been seen, and the ore itself is always at least cracked. TYPES OF OCCURRENCE Gradational Type In the area of biotite norite which lies northwest of Crugers, a number of small emery pits have been sunk. The ore seems to be widely devel- oped in this district, but the veins are all small and rapidly pinch out. The ore is of the spinel emery type; it is sometimes in sharp veins, pet more often it grades into the quartz-emery schist. The small pit which offers the best opportunity for study lies 250 feet due south of the point at which the mica schist inclusion outcrops on the post-road. In this pit, an unmistakable quartz emery schist with streaks of coarse red garnet lies to the north, 7. e., nearest the schist inclusion ; it is adjoined on the south by the remnants of the ore, about two feet in width. This ends abruptly as far as could be ascertained in the field; but specimens of the adjoining rock taken one, two and four feet from the contact were respectively spinel norite with garnet, spinel norite and norite. This rock was of the ordinary variety described on page 30, with the spinels merely superposed upon it. This gradation appears to be the typical association of the emery in this district, although the cuttings are not confined to this distance from the large schist inclusion. The ore is important chiefly from a theoretical standpoint; only a very lim- ited amount has been taken out. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES we WY Emery Schist Type Emery schist is a very common type in the southeastern part of the Cortlandt area, in the Dickerson and Salt Hill region. The country had here been widely prospected for iron at the time when it was thought that the ore was magnetite. The emery has been mined on the roadside, at the southeast corner of Salt Hill; and it is said to run more or less continuously over the mountain to the north. Here it appears to trend more to the east, being mined in several places on the eastern slope of Dickerson Hill. This seems to be the chief vein, but there are several other outcrops, some of which are along the border of the district to the west and east. In all of the outcrops visited by the writer, the ore is of the same type; a vein of black emery (which in thin section is seen to be the feldspathic variety) is bordered on either side by the quartz emery schist. More often, perhaps, no distinction can be made between the two; the emery merely becomes quartzose in streaks. Bands of pure quartz a foot or more across are not uncommon. The quartz streaks are not always straight; they are often strongly contorted and crumpled. The opening on the road above referred to is within a hundred feet of the border of the series, and possibly less; and so closely does the emery in all but _ color resemble a coarse schist, that it was difficult to decide on its iden- tity offhand. To the north of this, about a quarter of a mile, is a small inclusion of mica schist, strike N. 20° E. 80° E.; and 75 yards south of this outcrop, emery is again taken out. The strike of this inclusion is very close to the general strike of the schist in this district and also of the emery schist. The latter varies from N. 35° E. to N. 60° E., but it generally approximates the former. On the west side of Salt Hill, ore was found in a tongue of pyroxenite which seemed to be projecting directly into another inclusion of schist. The ore of this type, therefore, is sometimes on the border of the series, near the contact with the mica schist, sometimes near an inclusion of the same in the igneous rocks, while again, although it shows exactly the same structure, no association with schist was observed. Norite Type Norite and the following type are found chiefly in the northeastern area, where all of the larger workings are located; but in this area, the emery is always associated with this peculiar variety of norite, or else as is indicated below under the following type. The succession and rela- "4. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES tions of the various rocks are, however, much more complicated than in the previous types, and three varieties may be distinguished. In one of the Dalton pits, a simple succession from the brown norite to ore to sillimanite schist was observed. The former is typical; the latter is coarser than usual, carries some garnet and sometimes shows crumpling and contortion. ‘The ore varies in width from two to ten feet and is of the pure variety. At the Buckbee mine, the underground work is inaccessible, having all caved; there are two open cuts, however, which seem to indicate the structure. These are both lenticular in ground plan, curving into the hill and out again. ‘The ore is an excellent one, being often nearly half corundum in large gray-brown crystals, and practically fresh and un- altered. It may at times carry garnet and occasionally pyrite in half inch crystals. In both of these pits, the wall rock is the brown norite, which in this case, however, resembles ordinary norite, in thin section, more closely. It is altered to chlorite in patches. Such of the ore as has not been taken out occurs in this rock in irregular veins, which often “break” into pockets. The poorest grades of ore resemble the streaky quartzose emery, but this in thin section resolves itself into a quartz sillimanite schist, often garnetiferous. There is a broad irregular band of coarse pyroxenite running horizontally through the cliff of brown norite, but it seems to be a local segregation, having nothing to do with the ore. A vogesite dike appears in both of the pits. The succession here may or may not be as in the gradational type; it would seem rather that the sillimanite schist encloses the ore and is itself surrounded by the norite. In the two other large pits on the Dalton property, a more complicated relation exists. The wall rock is a quartz gabbro; this becomes a much chloritized pyroxenite of the usual type, which passes into brown norite. The latter is at first chiefly hypersthene, but it becomes feldspathic near the ore, which is of the pure variety. Sillimanite schist is plentiful; in one case, it occurs in irregular fine-grained masses on the other side of the ore, while in the second case, it seems to occur mingled with the ore. Kssentially the same succession is to be observed in the latest cut of the McCoy mine. This is about 30 feet wide by 45 feet deep, and 35 feet high and gives the complete cross section. At a short distance away, the whole ledge resembles a sandstone with vertical dip, owing to the regular zones in which the types occur (Plate V, fig. 1). Starting from the west, the succession is biotite norite (typical), sillimanite schist, “ore” (sillimanite schist with spinel, very fissile, or “slatey’ as the miners call it), then the typical sillimanite schist again; this succession ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 5 is then repeated on a smaller scale, with an exceptionally fine grained biotite norite. This is evidently an apophysis of the larger mass project- ing into the schist. On the east, the wall rock is a hornblende pyrox- enite, which seems to be the real country. Micaceous Type Two of the three larger pits of the McCoy mine and most of the smaller prospects scattered over the hill are of micaceous type, in which a sheared micaceous rock is associated with the ore. The ore from the large pit of the mine, and the chamber connected with it (described above), was the best mined anywhere in the district, except possibly Buckbee’s. Small areas of pink and blue corundum emery were found in this pit. In the other pits, it is a lower grade of spinel emery, seldom showing the corundum crystals. In the large pit, which is about 80 feet deep, of which depth 30 feet is below water, the sides are not quite vertical, dipping 70°-85° S. This is most apparent at the eastern end, where the wall rock is very mica- ceous, dipping as above and striking N. 80° E. At times, it strongly resembles Manhattan schist; again, the mica may be all biotite, and the feldspar may diminish until the rock is practically an aggregate of ande- sine, with less orthoclase and a great amount of biotite. Scattered through these minerals is abundant spinel, with varying amounts of corundum. At the west end of the pit, the wall rock is diorite, with strongly pleochroic hornblende, which is in idiomorphic crystals often absorbed and embayed and considerably in excess of the biotite. To the east and south of the mica rock lies a pyroxenite, carrying hornblende and some biotite; and it may also contain sillimanite and garnet. The large veins of ore, if not worked out, are below water level and inacces- sible; but the mica rock carries small veins of spinel emery. Men who had worked this pit stated that the ore was always found in this black mica rock, often associated with garnets; that occasionally white mica was found with it, and that in the ore itself would sometimes be found little bunches of black mica or green mica (clinochlore ?). On the dump, a large amount of the quartzose-streaked emery was found, but it was not observed in place. About 50 feet to the east of this pit is the head of a cut extending 300 feet east. It is 30 to 60 feet wide, becoming at its head 50 feet deep. The wall rock on either side is a typical looking diorite, as in the large pit. Then, starting from the diorite, comes a rock which entirely resem- bles a mica schist (N. 80°-90° E., 75°-90° S.), but which proves in thin 6 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES section to be a biotite norite carrying abundant spinel and some corun- dum. Adjoining it is a poor ore, which is a sillimanite schist. with abun- dant cordierite. Then comes a brown norite, which is followed by a good spinel emery; and hornblende pyroxenite separates this from the diorite. This is, however, an ideal cross-section, found only in one place; in other places, the succession is less regular and often repeats itself. In a 40-foot cut to the northeast, the structure is exactly the same, except that the spinel norite is replaced by spinel diorite, as in the large pit, and that the brown norite is lacking. In these three pits of the McCoy mine, then, the ore occurs in a schistose, spinel-bearing micaceous rock, either diorite or norite, and is associated with sillimanite schist and hornblende pyroxenite. The Chase mine, which is the last to be described, appears to be similar in structure to these; but garnets in great abundance are found there. he ore occurs in a ledge, flanked on one side by a corundum-bearing sillimanite schist, which at times becomes very coarse; and on the other by a very biotitic rock, similar to that in the large pit of the McCoy mine, except that it carries corundum in irregular masses instead of spinel. In irregular association with the ore occurs a feldspathic rock contain- ing abundant garnets. From a rotten zone in this rock, well-formed trapezohedrons one and a half inches in diameter can be readily ex- tracted. This rock in thin section is seen to be chiefly a basic altered feldspar, with a little biotite, spinel and corundum and the large garnets. It may occur in the ore in irregular masses, but is chiefly separate. In the ore itself, garnet occurs abundantly, both as crystals and as rounded flow-like masses, often four or five inches across. The ore is somewhat peculiar aside from this, being more than half corundum in fairly fresh white crystals; for the rest, it is made up of spinel, magnetite, allanite end garnet. This is a high grade ore, but it is injured by the abundance of brittle garnet and allanite. Around the cutting for a few hundred feet, a very garnetiferous rock extends, whose dark mineral is probably an altered hornblende, constituting a diorite. The true country rock is, however, a pyroxenite, which varies an indicated on the map. The foregoing description of the emery deposits may be epitomized as follows: 1. The ore usually occurs in a region in which mica schist inclusions are abundant and often within a hundred feet or so of such an inclusion; and the largest mines (McCoy, Dalton, etc.) are within 1000 feet of the border of the Cortlandt Series. 2. The ore is always in sharply defined veins, pockets or lenses, but its constituents often occur disseminated through the rocks immediately adjacent. ROGERS, GHOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES vara 3. The ore is immediately associated with abnormal rocks, containing sillimanite, cordierite, garnet, quartz or allanite, which are found no- where else in the area, except around certain schist inclusions near Crugers; or more rarely, it adjoins rocks which are normal except for the spinel scattered through them. There is often a great abundance of biotite around the ore, which is also characteristic of these inclusions. 4, These rocks often exhibit evidences of shearing, faulting and crack- ing, which is rare in other parts of the district, except around schist inclusions. ORIGIN In reviewing the possible modes of origin of the emery in the Cort- landt Series, it appears evident that only two are plausible; the emery may be pyrogenic, due to magmatic segregation, or due to the absorption of some of the numerous schist inclusions in the area. The evidence may perhaps be more effectively weighed if we first briefly consider the artificial production of corundum and its occurrence in other districts. Artificial Production of Corundum Several French geologists have been especially active in the field of synthetic mineralogy,®* but their results in this connection are of little importance. Many of them worked with alumina and artificial salts, -so that their processes find no equivalent in nature; others dissolved alumina in various melted minerals, adding in some cases a trace of ammonium fluoride or some similar salt. These last experiments are of more importance in a geological way, but they appear to have no appli- cation to the Cortlandt Series. The only relevant case that the writer has been able to find of the production of corundum by the simple fusion of a mineral is described by Vernadsky.®*? He observed the formation of corundum and silli- manite in a melt of muscovite, in the course of his experiments on the genesis of sillimanite.® Probably the most important investigation from a geological point of view is that undertaken by J. Morozewicz.** Basing his work on the 6 FouguE and L&vy. Synthese des Minéraux et des Roches, Paris. 1882. See also L. Bourcsors, ‘Reproduction artificielle des minéraux,’’ in Fremy’s Encyclopédie chimique, II, pt. 3, p. 63. On the Sillimanite Group, and the Role of Alumina in Silicates. Moscow, p. 83. 1891. (Russian.) He also describes the formation of sillimanite from clay in “Sur la reproduction de la Sillimanite,’’ Bull. Soc. france. de minéral., p. 256. 1890. * Corundum is commercially manufactured by the Norton Emery Company at Niagara Falls by the fusion of bauxite, previously rendered anhydrous by thorough heating. & “Experiment. Untersuchungen itiber d. Bildung d. Mineralien im Magma.”’ Tscher- mak’s mineral. und petrog. Mittheil., XVIII, pp. 1-90 and 105-240. 1898. 738 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES principles of Vogt and Lagorio, he rejected the French synthetic methods as unnatural and studied the deposition of corundum in the melts of a large glass factory, where he could control his temperatures up to 2100° C. His melts varied in size up to one hundred pounds or more. They were made up, sometimes of the pure salts and sometimes of pow- dered minerals, to approximate the composition of certain natural erup- tive rocks. They were contained in clay crucibles, whose position in the furnace might be varied according to the degree of heat desired. A point often overlooked in connection with this investigation, and one which he states to be its most serious defect,®° is that 30 per cent. of his melts were spoiled because they attacked the clay crucibles. Melts high in magnesia with low alumina and alkalis, were especially prone to this, deriving alumina from the crucible to form spinel, while those rich in lime, alumina and alkalis had no effect at the highest heat. The results of this well-known study prove that the role of alumina in a magma is entirely analogous to that of silica; if it be saturated with respect to alumina, corundum will separate out just as quartz does in a granite. An alumino-silicate magma is saturated when it has the general compo- sition MeO, m Al,0O,, n SiO, (Me—K,, Na,, Ca, and n=2 — 13) and m is more than one. If silica is also in excess. (over 13), sillimanite is formed. If magnesia and iron are present in excess, they will form spinel; or if silica is also in excess, cordierite will separate. The sepa- ration of corundum from a magma, therefore, is governed by definite laws; and minerals, moreover, which have previously been thought of as due to contact action are thus shown to be pyrogenic under certain conditions. Morozewicz in a previous paper® had shown that alumina will readily dissolve in a molten magma whose composition approximates that of basic magnesian rocks, and that on cooling, the excess alumina separates out as corundum and spinel. Corundum may, therefore, be formed by the action of “agents miné- ralisateurs” on alumina, or by the fusion of certain aluminous minerals, or by the solution of alumina to supersaturation in molten magmas. Origin of Corundum in Other Localities Since the emery of the Cortlandt Series is always in igneous rock, only a few similar occurrences of corundum in other localities will be noticed.*” & Op. cit., p. 18. % Zeitsch. fur Krystall., XXIV, 281. 1895. See also LaGorio, idem. p. 285. 87 For a full discussion, see J. H. Pratt, Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., pp. 71-96. 1906. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 79 Corundum is found in North Carolina in peridotite segregated at the contact of the igneous rock with gneiss. There is a sharp contact with the gneiss, but the corundum grades into the peridotite. Pratt®* he- lieves that it separated out of the magma as an original constituent, ac- cording to the laws cited above, and segregated at the border in a fashion analogous to that of pyrrhotite or ilmenite. The earlier writers,®? how- ever, believe that it is due to contact action on the gneiss. Corundum is also found in plumasite in Plumas County, California, and there is no doubt that it is an original pyrogenic constituent.”° Corundum has been found on the contact of granite and clay slate on Dartmoor in Devonshire, apparently due to contact action," and at con- tacts between granite and micaceous quartzite near Morlaix, France, having the same origin and associated with sillimanite and andalusite, spinel, etc.*? Corundum in sapphire crystals has been found in a monchiquite dike at Yogo, Montana. The rock is too low in alumina, however, for it to have separated out as an original constituent, and it is probably due to inclu- sions of argillaceous sediment derived from the underlying rocks.7* Co- rundum and zircon found in basalt and other basic rocks in Haute Loire” are thought also to be due to the destruction of gneiss inclusions. Corundum, then, in igneous rocks, may be due to magmatic segregation, or to contact action, or to the absorption of aluminous inclusions. Evidence as to Its Formation in the Cortlandt Series It has been shown above that the emery in the Cortlandt Series is often streaky in appearance; usually associated with inclusions of mica schist or found near the borders of the area but not on them; immediately asso- ciated with sillimanite rocks and other abnormal varieties; showing no marked preference for any country rock as previously supposed, though found most generally in pyroxenite, and often associated with rocks which have undergone metamorphic action. Spinel and corundum may be scat- tered through the adjoining rocks for a few yards or less whether it be an abnormal rock or a normal igneous flow. 688 Tdem, p. 81. 6 See for example T. M. Chatard, Bull. 42, U.S. G.S., p. 45. 1887. 7 Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., p. 94. 1906. 71K. Busz, Geol. Mag., p. 492. 1896. 72 A, K. COOMARA—SWAMy, Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc., LVII, 185. 1901. 737,. V. Pirsson, “Petrography of the Igneous Rocks of the Little Belt Mountains,” Montana, 20th Ann. Rep. U. 8. G.S., pt. 3, p. 554. 1900. 74 A, Lacroix, “Sur l’origine du zircon et du corindon de la Haute Loire,” Bull. Soc. franc. de minéral., p. 100. 1890. 80 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The Theory of Magmatic Segregation That magmatic segregation is possible is proved by the experiments of Morozewicz, who has shown that corundum may separate out of a super- saturated magma and that the associated minerals, which were formerly supposed to be due in every case to contact action, may have a similar origin. If it has so formed, we should expect it to show probably a close association with the border of the igneous area, as in the case of the Caro- lina peridotite, simce such an abundance of early-crystallizing minerals would be carried to the borders by convection currents, or by some process akin to Soret’s principle. It shows a rather close association, in some cases occurring practically on the border, while the most important, mine is located within a thousand feet of it. Other occurrences are, however, a mile or more removed. ‘The ore is disseminated to a certain degree through the surrounding rocks, which are sometimes otherwise normal and sometimes extraordinary aggregates of the minerals which have been shown to be associated with pyrogenic corundum under certain conditions. Moreover, the magnetite which is associated so plentifully with the ore is known to be in other localities a basic segregation,”® although in such cases it is usually highly titaniferous. It is possible, therefore, that the ore has separated out of the magma as an original pyrogenic constituent. There are certain phenomena, however, which this hypothesis does not account for. If the emery shows any preference for the borders, as in the case of the Carolina peridotite, it should show a distinct preference, occur- ring directly on the borders as a sharp contact but grading into the igneous rock. In no case, however, was it observed directly on the border or even on the margin of an inclusion. Moreover, in none of the cases of pyrogenic corundum cited by either Morozewicz™® or Lagorio™ is magnet- ite a very important constituent; certainly in none does it occur in excess of the corundum. Basic segregations of magnetite, furthermore, are usually very titaniferous,* while in the Cortlandt Series, the average of Ti0, in the four different emery analyses is 1.90 per cent, while in seven analyses of the important igneous rocks of the district, the average is 2.15 per cent., running much the lowest in the pyroxenites. Nor does this theory explain the dynamic action which is so evident at the mines and almost confined to them; nor the streaked appearance of the ore in a very 7% See for a summary Kemp’s Ore Deposits of the U. S., p. 171, ete. 1906. 7 Min. pet. Mitth., XVIII, 212-219. 1898. 7 Zeit. Kryst. Min., XXIV, 285. 1895. 7 Thus, for example, the ore from the classic locality for this process, Taberg, is almost an ilmenite; similarly the Cumberlandite of Rhode Island, the titaniferous mag- netites of the Adirondacks, ete. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 81 important variety, unless indeed flowage after the separation of the emery is postulated. Finally, the abundant garnets found at the Chase mine are not explained, nor the biotite at the McCoy and Chase mines; nor is the association of the emery with quartz accounted for. It would be diffi- cult to explain how corundum could separate in the presence of quartz, since according to Morozewicz the two would combine to form sillimanite. Theory of the Absorption of Sedimentary Material The possibility of the effectiveness of the absorption of sedimentary material is evidenced by the fact cited above from Morozewicz, viz., clay crucibles are attacked at a high temperature by melts rich in MgO and poor in Al,O, and alkalis, such as pyroxenite. If this could take place at 2100° C. with a low pressure, it appears certain that a molten magma of such composition could readily attack a more or less attenuated inclusion of mica schist; and the abundance of these inclusions in the district has already been shown.”® Lacroix,®® moreover, states the following general rule: “Si l’enclave différe beaucoup de la roche eruptive par sa teneur en silice, elle est facilement detruite et l’on n’en trouve plus, en général, que des traces.” This principle had been applied by him in Haute Loire and by Pirsson at Yogo, Montana. In such a case, the process would involve the separation of a small mass of aluminous sediment and its more or less complete absorption by the subterranean magma. This would give rise to a local enrichment in alumina, which would then be deposited according to the laws enunciated by Morozewicz. The theory thus involves certain features of both mag- matic segregation and contact action, but it is essentially neither; nor does it involve the old view which Morozewicz and Lagorio have shown to be false, that corundum is infusible in a magma and that it merely repre- sents the unattacked portions of the xenolith. The occurrence is taken by the writer to be a strong confirmation of the laboratory experiments of these geologists, rather than to oppose them. The accompanying analysis of mica schist was made with a view to de- termining the extent to which this rock could have contributed alumina. The percentage found (21.70) is only slightly above that in the norites; pure norite (which is chiefly feldspar) reaches 20.72 per cent., being the highest. The pyroxenites in which the ore is generally found run about 7JIn this connection, also, the limestone inclusions of the district, altered to lime pyroxenite in one case, wernerite schist in another and a garnet-tremolite rock in a third, may be recalled as indicating the capability of the igneous rock to absorb and work over an included mass. The fact that most of the inclusions of schist practically lack mica, which must have been absorbed by the magma, may also be recalled. 8 Op. cit., p. 101. 82 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES four to six per cent. The specimens of schist analyzed had undergone little or no contact action; but it will be recalled that at Crugers, for example, the schist shows a steady increase in alumina as the igneous rock is approached, until on the contact the per cent. is 29.50, as shown by Williams’s analyses. The same, moreover, holds with regard to iron; the unaffected schist runs 7 or 8 per cent., but at the contact shows 25 per | cent. Even at a point 700 yards from the contact, the schist runs 24.32 per cent. in Al,O, and 11.12 per cent. FeO and Fe,0,. The reason* for this increase is a question beyond the province of this paper; the fact remains that the mica schist in contact with the igneous rock is abund- antly able to contribute alumina and iron and that even the unaltered schist is much higher in alumina than the most common country rock of the emery. The silica of the schist presumably goes to form the quartz streaks so generally found with the emery. That the emery may be formed by the absorption of schist is also indicated by its occurrences in the cliff of diorite at Crugers. As described above, every gradation, from the unaltered mica schist to one composed chiefly of quartz, biotite, magnetite, sillimanite, garnet, etc., at the contact and so to the inclusions in the igneous rock itself, composed of magnetite, spinel and corundum, may be traced. These thin lenses of magnetite and spinel are so completely changed that they were once mined for iron. Moreover, pleonaste was found in the garnet rock from the contact at Salt Hill; and it was found in one case in an igneous dike cutting limestone. The sillimanite, etc., with which the emery is associated, may, accord- ing to Morozewicz, be found when the ore is pyrogenic, although N. H. and A. N. Winchell state that sillimanite “in igneous rocks occurs only as a result of absorption of foreign material.” *? It is at least certain that it occurs abundantly on the borders of the district, where it can only be due to contact action. Garnet, which is also found as a reaction mineral, is a similar case. The great abundance of biotite in some of the mines is paralleled by its abundance at the Crugers contact, and the green mica which is said to occur sometimes in the emery is also found by Williams in certain inclusions and identified by him as margarite. Quartz is com- mon on the contact and also constitutes the bulk of some of the inclusions at Crugers ; its association with the emery is thus paralleled, whereas it is apparently not known in association with true pyrogenic corundum. If this theory be correct, anything like a sharp contact of the emery or its associates with the mica schist would not be expected, nor, in fact, 81 There seems to be no warrant for thinking that the igneous rock could have con- tributed this iron and alumina, as is often the case in garnet zones in limestone. 82 Optical Mineralogy, N. Y., p. 363. 1909. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 83 would the mineral be looked for directly on the contact. It is evident that if the emery is the result of the absorption of the schist, larger masses of the latter might be looked for in the neighborhood, but if the inclusion were small and therefore easily assimilated, they would, of course, not be found. Thus, in some cases we find inclusions of schist near the emery, but never to the writer’s knowledge nearer than 200 feet; and often they are lacking. The resemblance of the Salt Hill types of ore to a black quartzose schist has already been remarked upon, and the rough approximation of its strike to that of the schist has also been noticed. In the light of the foregoing facts, it would appear that these occurrences are merely par- tially assimilated inclusions of schist entirely analogous to those so well exposed at Crugers; whereas when the schist is quite absorbed, a much more complex aggregation of minerals results, containing no quartz except in a similar streaky mass at the borders. In the case of the emery pit in the biotite norite area north of Crugers, where the spinel grades into the surrounding rock, this gradation may be thought of as a quick lessening of the effects produced by the absorption of the schist, 7. e., the enrich- ment in alumina is naturally merely a local development, although at the same time it can have nothing like a sharp contact. This same statement, of course, applies to similar cases at the other mines. Reference to Morozewicz’s paper, summarized above, will furnish the conditions under which the several minerals must have formed. It must not be supposed, however, that anything like a simple direct linear variation exists between the schist and any of the igneous rocks; a segregational process of some kind must be postulated, for even a richly aluminous schist could not form as a direct hybrid a rock carrying the 59 per cent. of Al,O, found in the richest emery. Or, since at times the schist retains something of its form and is evidently not entirely absorbed, it may be supposed that the hybrid formed contains the schist constitu- ents in greater quantity than those of the igneous rock. The variation diagram as constructed between mica schist and quartz emery schist and a typical norite shows a distinct approach to linear variation, but if pyroxenite be used instead of norite, the curves are often sharp; and it is evident that more analyses must be made before the crude process out- lined above can be reduced to an exact determination. The final point to be considered—the dynamic action at the mines—is one whose significance is not clear. The fact remains that similar effects are common, though not universal, around the schist inclusions of the district, thus emphasizing a further similarity. It was suggested above by the writer that it might be due to shearing along zones of weakness in 84 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES the area, which would naturally occur chiefly along the borders of foreign inclusions and conceivably in places where these inclusions had been absorbed. In the case of the mines, it is also possible that the schistose rock is an altered inclusion of the schist itself; but the entire absence of quartz and muscovite and the presence at times of such minerals as hypersthene tend to refute this view. Finally, it is possible that these rocks may be inclusions of Highland gneiss; but if they were, their action on the igneous rocks would be undoubtedly similar to that of the schist, and, moreover, their associations indicate that they are not foreign masses. This completes what the writer has to say concerning the origin of the emery. From the points brought out, it is evident that the ore has in most cases at least been formed by the action of the igneous rock upon included material, thus giving rise to a magma supersaturated with re- spect to iron and alumina; and out of this the corundum and its asso- ciates crystallized according to the laws formulated by Morozewicz. The evidence, while sufficient to justify a fairly positive statement, is, of course, not entirely satisfactory, and the process is not as simple as indi- cated. ‘There seem to be no definite objections to this theory, however, while those which confront that of magmatic segregation either through the mass or at the cooler borders, appear to be insuperable. It might also be suggested that the highly aluminous Hudson River slates, which probably once covered the district, furnished the alumina, but no trace of them has been found in the field. There are inclusions of schist in the diorite area which are generally associated with a fine black pyrox- enite, but around which no emery has been found to the writer’s knowl- edge; although the farmers, judging from its toughness and color, be- lieve that it is “full of emery.” If it does not contain emery in any place—except possibly the very narrow zone almost on the contact, which we would expect by analogy from the effects at Crugers—it merely in- dicates that these inclusions were particularly quartzose and compact and retained their identity to an exceptional degree. As implied above, it is not the large, well defined inclusions from which we would expect emery to be derived, but rather the smaller fragments torn from these inclu- sions and probably entirely absorbed. From this fact, it is evident that little can be predicted concerning the probable extension of the emery. While pyroxenite, being low in Al,O, and high in MgO, may readily attack the schist, the usual associa- tion of the ore with this rock is not an essential limitation; and its rela- tions to the borders of the area are vague and irregular. Possibly, a study of the mica schist at the borders nearest the mines might throw light on the particular variety of schist most susceptible of absorption, but this question has not been investigated by the writer. ROGERS, GEOLOGY OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES 85 The technology of corundum is discussed by J. H. Pratt.’* From the composition of the Cortlandt emery as described above, it is evident that it is low grade ore. The presence of spinel, sillimanite, garnet, feldspar, quartz, etc., greatly lowers its cutting efficiency and materially affects its toughness. At the same time, the presence of spinel, which is 8 in hard- ness, would not interfere with the manufacture of a vitrified emery wheel; and for many purposes where extreme hardness is not required, the spinel emery furnishes a convenient transition between garnet and true emery. The unsuccessful attempt to smelt the more ferriferous varieties for iron has been noted above. Even earlier than this, it had been suggested*®* that the ore might be used as a refractory lining for the puddling furnace, open hearth and Bessemer converter, as well as an aluminous flux in the blast furnace in admixture with a siliceous stock, but apparently these sugestions have not proved practicable. SUMMARY The Cortlandt Series is an igneous complex situated just southeast of Peekskill, N. Y., and is about 28 square miles in extent. Its correlation cannot be definitely settled, although it is probably late Paleozoic. The rocks have been described by J. D. Dana and G. H. Williams, the former attacking them from the standpoint of genesis, and the latter treating them rather as an aggregation of petrographic types. In the present paper, they are treated more from a geological standpoint, the differen- tiations made in the various broad types being directly proportionate to their areal importance. Reference to the appended map will impart the distribution and extent of the varieties determined, and on page 58 is given a diagram which indicates the most salient relations between the several types. The various differentiations of the norite magma are most centrally located; they are flanked on both sides by pyroxenites which extend to the west, and an unknown distance under the river, pos- sibly as far as Stony Point, where they again outcrop. Between the norites and the western area of the pyroxenites lies a diorite area. The granites are more isolated, though unquestionably part of the series. The most basic members at least grade into one another in many cases, while at times, sharp contacts have been found. The analyses of the more important types indicate an unmistakable serial relationship, although complicated by the entrance of the pyroxenites. It is probable that the latter were intruded first, followed closely by the norites, so that 8 Bull. 269, U.S. G.S., p. 159. 1906. % J. P. KIMBALL, Amer. Chemist, IV, 321. 1874. This paper contains four analyses of the emery. 86 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES sometimes these varieties are found banded together in flow-like masses. The diorites must have come next, since the granites were evidently the last to form. Dikes are abundant throughout the series and vary. in composition from pegmatite to peridotite. Many inclusions of schist, and some of limestone and gneiss, are found in the district. These are most prominent in the large diorite area and in the district near Salt Hill. At times, they have been absorbed by the molten magma, giving rise to very abnormal rocks. Contact metamor- phism is also apparent around them, and on the borders of the series in places, developing in the schist an abundance of biotite, quartz, mag- vetite and many aluminous minerals; and in the limestone wernerite, diopside and other lime compounds. Dynamic metamorphism is indicated by all of these rocks to a slight though constant degree; but this metamorphism sometimes .assumes very marked proportions around the foreign inclusions in the district and in places from which the emery has been mined. The economic geology is confined chiefly to granite quarrying and emery mining. The emery has been generally considered as an example of magmatic segregation, but more detailed work would seem to indicate that it is due to the absorption of sedimentary xenoliths. This would give rise to a magma supersaturated with respect to iron and alumina, from which emery would separate out according to the laws formulated by Morozewicz. This view of the origin of the emery is supported by its frequent, somewhat remote association with visible inclusions of schist ; by its association with exactly the same suite of minerals as those developed on the borders of the district and in certain inclusions whose relations are unmistakable, and by its frequent occurrence banded with quartz, sometimes contorted and resembling exactly a black quartz schist. PLATH III PYROXENITE AND DIORITE Fig. 1. Rounded form of olivine pyroxenite outcrop at Chase Corners, caused by the weathering of the olivine. This rock is never found in roches moutonnées, as are the other rocks of the series Fig. 2. Stringers of Quartz Schist in Diorite, Buchanan *. peear S08 Coen. rile, ache ~_ # -_ ee ire vies tie Toucst tecke B45 ce Spr fre wen? . Hes tag . Mea is Stic,” Pee <2 D- Bye es ine ages ater) : ber SRK . ae eS ke < M4 ¥~ 7 = a ~_ - ‘ . ~ = : - ‘ . ey - =— . > : i rs ¥ - . = ; — ad 4 a ‘ . - M4 73 » « * é - “ pa ' P dy Ge es Py a , ee 4 4 . To 3 —> - ¥ rs aA ol wg are oF } oh a eat 2: L AcAD. § ¥- N. ANNALS 1 Fic. ars PLATE IV GNEISSOID STRUCTURE Vig. 1. Original Gneissoid Structure, on road near Pleasantside Wig. 2. Original Gneissoid Structure, one mile south of Spitzenberg Hill ae .P, ¥e py - t PLATE V MCCOY MINE AND SCHIST Fig. 1. The latest cutting in the McCoy Mine, showing the emery banded with sillimanite schist Fig. 2. Quartz Hmery Schist, Salt Hill, showing the streaked appearance of this low grade ore + : i bye ‘Syatoetent ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCI. VOLUME XXI, PLATE V _ PLATE VI : = “GEOLOGICAL MAP OF THE CORTLANDT SERIES ses ae ee +i PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyczum or Natura History, 1817-1876) The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. : (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contains the scientific contributions and reports of researches, eee with the records of meetings and similar matter. A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus- trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued. All. publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to _ THE LIBRARIAN, New York Academy of Sciences, care of American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. fi ae eT ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. XXI, pp. 87-117, pll. VII-IX Editor, EpmMunpD OTIs HovrEy THE INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND OF ENVIRONMENT IN DETERMINING THE COAT COLORS IN MICE BY T. H. Morgan NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 5 Jury, 1911: \ THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum or Natura History, 1817-1876) OFFICERS, 1911 President—Franz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GrorcE F. Kunz, Frepertc A. Lucas, R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—EDMUND OtT1s Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—HeEnny EK. Crampton, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMItirn, 40 Wall Street Inbrarian—RatpuH W. Towser, American Museum SHCTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY ~ Chairman—GuorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—CuHar es P. BerKey, Columbia. University SHCTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—F reveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University ~ Secretary—Epwarp J. THarouer, Teachers’ College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chatrman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University Secretary—FReEDERIC LyMaNn WELLS, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West Jeet iis Fore LA. [ANNALS N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XXI, pp. 87-117, pll. VII-IX. 5 July, 1911.] THE INFLUENCE OF HEREDITY AND OF ENVIRONMENT IN DETERMINING THE COAT COLORS IN MICE By T. H. Morean CONTENTS Page Mini tO TUNE TIO MEL ee toler wiaetotehadacalel < havelaloie sok ous s'6.«,5,/02)6' a's oe een: feels 'e evareter neato te 88 Crosses between a wild sport of Mus musculus and domesticated varieties. 88 Deseription of the wild sport. :......... cece ccc ceccces wide Giatetee ares ' 8&9 Crosses between the wild sport and domesticated races with uniform COO dace od AA OB eae a ator: BP REET M. Sat iocattaleto ed Sheiaiesd aie at's che Seheeienene 90 Crosses between the sport and yellow mice...................... 90 Crosses between the sport and gray mice................-...-20- 92 Crosses between the sport and black mice...............-.-2+--0- 92 Crosses between the sport and chocolate mice.................-4. 92 Crosses between the sport and albinos. ..............00-00+20s00 93 Crosses between F,, hybrid sports and yellows........-.....-... 93 @rassestpeiweenr +, By BEIGMSDOTES a:- 10 <1s << « 3) vacy MLADEN * > ei : : ; rs ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE VII G. Rrecrout, Del. PLATE VIII CHANGES IN COAT COLORS OF MICE Vig.1. No. NMA. A hybrid out of a black-gray (extracted) cross. Fig. 2. No. AAbb. A heterozygous white-bellied gray showing light gray and some gray areas. Fig.3. No. NMA. A heterozygous mouse showing black and gray areas. lec HIN es af eh *\* (iv a ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE VIII G. Riccroui, Del. aN , 9d Te sere R: “IM 30 aaoi6d T4097 - s an yads WE apis OF Beilin S = , 2 = + bot Sina t¥ouY edt 101 Ds al ehdt ai Selon “goat ehilt euls gobhrode Be Seles oie teouin i ; ANNALS N. Y. ACAD. SCIENCES VOLUME XXI, PLATE IX G. Riccrout, Del. PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum oF NatoraL History, 1817-1876) The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. : (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contains the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the records of meetings and similar matter. A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of — the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus- trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs, ete. The price is one dollar per part as issued. All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to THE LIBRARIAN, New York Academy of Sciences, care of American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. \ ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES : Vol. XXL, pp. 119-156 Editor, EpmMunp Otis Hovry nS ON SOME NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF PENNSYLVANIAN FOSSILS FROM THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA “ BY GEORGE H. GirTy NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 26 Auaust, 1911 THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyczeum oF Natural History, 1817-1876) OFFICERS, 1911 President—FRaAnz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GurorGE F. Kunz, FrepEric A. Lucas, : R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—Epmunp Otis Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—Hernnry E. CRAMPTON, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMILt1n, 40 Wall Street LAbrarian—RatreH W. Tower, American Museum —_ SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chairman—GeEorGE F, Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—CHARLES P. Berxey, Columbia University SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—F reveric A. Lucas, Brooklyn Museum Secretary—L. Hussakor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—Epwarp J. THatcHer, Teachers College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY * Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortnH, Columbia University Secretary—FreEpreric Lyman WeE.ts, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy -are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. [ANNALS N. Y. Acab. Scr., Vol. XXI, pp. 119-156. 26 August, 1911.] ON SOME NEW GENERA AND SPECIES OF PENNSYL- VANIAN FOSSILS FROM THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA? By George H. Girtry CONTENTS Page BNET Rstans CHEN ET EEL CUMP Meares ae ae Tao So fac catia et Renee Castes od cus ciche Snyteare'a) bondi Gl aie anaes oR 119 WESEcrIpPLiONS, Ol Genera “and SpPeCies tel se nse cle a2 s bcls soe sede alt ee eee 740) JETRORLOVAOY ue RG iches PPD IEE AU LR OT OA 7 Otic CORDIC TOI CRI rock 120 SOMMERS pes ie he setae cohel ai esac Pte Ata) cue eta ew eee bets Lead st avereccslanei aleve. ora, s.e sieeers 121 NE OIGMEC Tea heel ae a ae eee eh iced Ute ne eRe eOW ON EE coche ee oa. valor diotarate Wedber a 122 GMT OO EI abel rem eis te ee ares bone 27d, 6's esac ete) Aros RRP Me es oie shen lt aia c/a eleven ee 122 PACHIINNES Ch Aer eater ter ey ecirae relia th oi ei si'e ccs we grS BUGIS ch ap MARC MP ST AVa neni s atareit eho ein) Sorat lester Mal 123 ES eG IOP OM A Arcee ei imo rehas age svewt iol Seance ucts MIOIIA Te hea oie. cede itll dle} ave on 125 ELC CU OC akeweycre ace Staiioctts os) vere. s wie se Siacdve le ebe euapeene one anata aaiee als aioe tonitiidl slishiots, 131 Ga NODOG aie. ne cletsteyese cists eke.'s.a% e's re" oveloxeretnn sjMeMopetisia yes ohonay ars ius S1.s'a fan ar uate’ 135 CRA SULOROPOUMA RE ers COM Teste eee ane oF Fe Mean ha es area Ohta bese iohie/siacare ovale manna 136 WEAN OPO ere crete ca ew oles bonis) ale ole a ern earn Meine ra ei ctcuats ceva toys: tate 142 CHUTE UCERUR oo Ri ea a a PS a Pk ae Pe eae 154 INTRODUCTION Geographically the Wewoka formation is typically exposed in the northwestern portion of the Coalgate and the southwestern portion of the Wewoka quadrangles of Oklahoma. Lithologically it consists of alternating bands of sandstone and shale,—four sandstone and three shale members—and it has a thickness of about 700 feet.2 Geologically the Wewoka formation is part of the Pennsylvanian series and in the Oklahoma section hes above a considerable thickness of Pennsylvanian rocks, but it probably correlates with the lower portion of the Pennsyl- vanian section of Kansas. The fauna of the Wewoka formation, so far as known, occurs in the two lower shales, from which the fossils weather free and for the most part in an unusually perfect condition of preservation. The fauna is highly differentiated, comprising not less than 148 species, and it is not 1 Published by permission of the Director of the United States Geological Survey. 2U. S. Geol. Survey, Geol. Atlas, Folio 74. 1901. (119) LIBRAR NEW YO BOTAN GARDE 120 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES confined chiefly to the brachiopoda like so many Carboniferous faunas, but presents all the zodlogical groups in just proportion. ‘The greater part of the fauna, as one would expect, consists of species already in the literature, but a considerable number of new forms, both genera and species, have been obtained. These are described below, but a report con- taining descriptions and figures of the entire fauna has been completed and submitted for publication as a bulletin of the United States Geo- logical Survey. DESCRIPTIONS OF GENERA AND SPECIES Protozoa Fusulina inconspicua sp. nov. Shell small, sub-cylindrical to somewhat fusiform. The average length is perhaps 3 mm., with a diameter of about 1 mm., but specimens 5.5 mm. long are not uncommon. A few have a length of 4 mm., while one example pro- visionally referred to this species is nearly 5 mm. long and 1.5 mm. in thick- ness. Different specimens vary appreciably in proportions, some being slender and others more robust. As is common in this genus, young specimens are relatively more slender than mature ones. For the most part, this species is of very regular growth with a sub-cylindrical shape abruptly rounded at the ends. Some specimens taper more distinctly than others. In general, this appears to be an immature character, appearing in young shells more than in mature ones and being retained to a later stage in some than in others. Initial cell rather large, about .1 mm. in diameter. The largest measured had a diameter of .11 mm., others .099 mm., still others .084 mm., and others even smaller. It seems reasonable to infer that the initial cell varies in size in different specimens, but that the smaller measurements are in many cases due to the section not passing through its center. The walls are thin, the septa and outer wall being nearly equal in thickness. The specimens studied do not show the minute structure. In mature specimens (1 mm. in diameter) five or even six revolutions of the outer wall can be counted in addition to the initial cell. In a mature specimen (1 mm. in diameter) some 23 septa occur in the outer volution, and this appears to be about normal. The specimens examined may not show this character with accuracy, but the sutures or superficial lines formed by the septa are indistinct and not depressed. They are straight or nearly straight at the surface, but a little below, the septa appear to become strongly plicated. Height of final chamber about .07 mm. or .08 mm.; thickness of the outer wall about one third to one fourth as much, or .028 mm. to .02 mm. This diminutive species, which occurs in great numbers at the one horizon in the Wewoka formation where it is found at all, is readily dis- tinguished from all other American species thus far known, by its much GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 1271 smaller size, and from some of them by its elongated and cylindrical instead of fusiform shape. In size, it resembles the European F’. min- tma,® but is somewhat larger, more slender in shape, and less fusiform. The shape is suggestive of I’. lutugint Schellwien* and F. longissima Moller,® but the size is very much smaller. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla. Spongie Wewokella gen. nov. The general shape of the present form is that of a cylinder with a large tubular cloaca. No dermal layer has been observed. The walls are rigid and made up of large spicules interlaced with one another. The typical spicular element appears to be the tetraxon, but many spicules do not show this shape and appear to be elongated, irregularly branched and more or less contorted. In general, however, the trend of the spicules is longitudinal. The form for which this title is introduced is rare in the Wewoka for- mation, only two specimens having come to hand. They might perhaps be referred to the genus Doryderma, were it not for the fact that they indicate a form which has a large central cloaca instead of a number of axial canals, and in which the radial canals of Doryderma are also appar- ently wanting. The general relationships of the type are nevertheless supposed to be with that genus, which has also been cited from Carbon- iferous strata. Type species, Wewokella solida. Wewokella solida sp. nov. Sponge body irregularly cylindrical, attaining a diameter of at least 25 mm. Center occupied by a large tubular cloaca, the walls being about 7 mm. thick and showing no evidence of being pierced by radial canals. If a dermal layer was originally present, it has been lost. The walls now are made up of large spicules, of which the typical shape is probably 4-rayed with one of the rays more or less elongated. At the same time, some of the rays may be aborted so that many of the spicules seem to be irregularly branched. They are so interwoven as to make up a wall of considerable rigidity, to aid in which the spicules may be partly cemented, although it is doubtful if they anastomose. The structure, then, while very varied in detail makes on the whole a homo- geneous wall which apparently is the same on the inside as on the out. Among the large spicules are other tetraxons of conspicuously smaller size. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla. 3 Paleontographica, vol. 55, p. 167, pl. 13, fig. 23. 1908. SIGE as Nitite Plo mihs HES. aes Meo. donna. 5 Idem, p. 163, pl. 13, figs. 14-20. 122 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Celenterata Lophophyllum profundum var. radicosum var. nov. Associated with individuals having the character of Lophophyllum pro- fundum, occur other specimens which differ strikingly in the profuse develop- ment of hollow, spiniform stolons. Correlated with this character are usually a more rapid expansion, a more irregular growth, a rather straighter shape and the possession of a thinner, more knife-like pseudo-columella. The stolons which are usually broken off close to the epitheca, disclosing their tubular structure, are especially developed in the lower portion of the corallum. It seems doubtful whether these structures served primarily for support, since they are found in specimens having an unusually broad and secure attachment and are absent from others in which the point of attachment is small, and the anchorage apparently insecure. The stolons vary from large and very abundant to small and reduced to only one or two in number. In this way, a gradual transition is effected between the two forms which in their extreme expressions look very much unlike each other, while among intermediate and less strongly characterized specimens, a dividing line can hardly be drawn. The forms with more or less straight, irregular, rapidly expanding coralla graduate on the one hand into those with very abundant stolons, and on the other into the narrow. more or less curved, regular coralla of typical profunduwm. It seems to be true, how- ever, that the narrow, regular growths seldom exhibit any development of the root-like process. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal- gate quadrangle, Okla. Echinodermata Hydreionocrinus patulus sp. nov. This species is based on a somewhat imperfect calyx which is distinguished by its low convexity. The median portion of the under side is strongly con- cave and the height of the whole is but little greater than the thickness of the plates. These peculiarities may, however, be somewhat enhanced by com- pression. The general shape is pentagonal, with angular notches at the corners and a wider irregularity at the azygous angle. The plates themselves are thick and they are highly tumid on the outer side. They tend to recurve near the mar- gins so that the sutures are not as depressed as the general curvature of the surface, if continued to the edges, would make them. The plates near their margins tend to be rather regularly and finely crenulated and the infra-basals and adjacent portions of the basals are finely granulose. Unless lost through erosion, these markings do not extend to the other plates. The infrabasals form a small pentagon of which the radius of the scar of the stem occupies half the distance from the center to the side. The scar is GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 123 small, crenulated about the circumference, and with a diminutive round axial canal. The basals are irregularly hexagonal, shaped more like a triangle with its basal angles truncated. That to the right of the azygous plates is slightly larger than the others and not symmetrical. The radials are seven-sided, twice as wide as high, the base of the heptagon being uppermost and very long. The two apical sides are also long and some- what concave, while the two lateral sides are short. The two plates near the azygous group are unsymmetrical, and have the apical sides of unequal length. Just below the upper margin of each of the radials occurs a short slit-like excavation. Above this on the broad upper side of the plate, there is a triangular depression defined by two elevations or ridges which also bend outward and extend along the outer margin of the upper surface. A some- what similar triangular excavation marks the inner side of the upper edge of the thick plate. The azygous basal is subquadrate, much longer than wide, in reality being 7-sided with a relatively broad base. The sides are formed by a broken line of which the lower portion is much shorter than the upper. The upper side is also made by a broken line, the dextral part of which is long and oblique and the sinistral short, merely truncating the angle which the other would otherwise make with the left side. This plete is therefore bounded below by the infrabasal, on the right and left sides by the basal and the radial, and on the upper side by the two other azygous plates. The second and third azygous plates are missing from the specimen, as are also the brachials. Hydreionocrinus patulus resembles H. discoidalis and H. crassidiscus. From the former it may be distinguished by its larger size, more convex plates, granulose surface and by the shape and arrangement of the azygous plates. The azygous basal in the present species is differently shaped, so that it is in contact at the right with the radial, thus sepa- rating the second azygous plate from the adjacent basal on that side. The relationship with crassidiscus is rather more close. The basals (“subradials”) are however described as all hexagonal, while here they are five-sided, except the azygous one, which is seven-sided. The azygous basal does not in crassidiscus reach the second basal “as is usual in this genus.” Furthermore, in the present species, the second azygous plate intervenes between the first and the radial to the right. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla. Annelida Enchostoma serpuliforme sp. nov. Attached to a large undetermined Orthoceras are some slender tubular organisins seeming to belong to the genus Enchostoma. One, from which the present description is drawn, has a diameter of 1 mm. or less and winds about on the Orthoceras to a length of almost 140 inm., without appreciably 124 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES inereasing its diameter. Neither the initial point nor the true aperture ap- pears to be shown. The cross-section must have been nearly circular. The shell substance, when preserved, is lamellose, phosphatic, of a light bluish color and in places distinctly nacreous. For the most part, however, the shell appears to be missing and only the muddy infilling of the tube remains, of a rusty color and partly with a dark limonitic coating. Where the entire organ- ism is removed, its place is represented by a groove. As the original test of the Orthoceras is now absent, this impression naturally occurs on the mold of the inside and the explanation of the phenomenon is difficult. I think we can not assume that the organism was originally attached to the inside of the Orthoceras, because of the septa. It may, however, have been attached to the outside or have been partly imbedded in the shell, through the gradual solu- tion of which these external bodies, insoluble under prevailing conditions, were brought into contact with the mud which filled the interior. This hypothesis, however, is unsatisfactory, because the specimen is not bent but broken by the compression which it has suffered, showing a rigid condition at the time the force was applied. The shape and phosphatic appearance of this organism are characteristic of Enchostoma, but such Enchostomas as I have heretofore seen are free and of larger size. The small size, sessile condition, and probably false appearance of having been partly imbedded in the shell of its host, are very suggestive of the organism which I have here called Serpulopsis insita, but none of the specimens of Serpulopsis shows any evidence of having had a phosphatic shell. They are also small and very much shorter. The true relationship of this form and its position in the animal kingdom remain problems as yet unsolved. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Okla. Serpulopsis gen. nov. This name is introduced for some small tubular organisms which enlarge very gradually and are frequently much contorted during part of their growth. They have the habit of attachment to other organisms and are more or less imbedded in the shell of their host. They always keep near the surface, but are perhaps as seldom completely superficial as they are completely imbedded. I can scarcely doubt that the fossils.on which this genus is founded belong to White’s Serpula insita, which, consequently, is taken as the type. Serpulopsis is distinguished from Serpula by its burrowing habit, which is in fact abnormal for the annelids. Even if the excavations alone and not the tubes which ordinarily occupy them were known, it would be impossible to refer these structures to the boring sponges which they somewhat suggest, because of their strictly superficial, linear and not inosculating character. In some respects, they suggest Rhopalonaria among the Bryozoa, but, while specimens frequently occur together in considerable numbers, they appear to form groups of independent indi- GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 125 viduals and not colonies, nor is there any evidence that the individual tubes were composite. On the whole, therefore, it seems more probable that this fossil was an abnormal type of annelid. Type species, Serpulopsis instta. Conularia crustula var. holdenvillz var. nov. A few specimens from the Wewoka agreeing in a general way with C. crus- tula differ in having the sculpture on a much finer scale. Unlike typical crustula also, these specimens are more or less compressed and distorted, the other form which aparently had an unusually thick rigid test not having suf- fered much in that way. About 25 costs occur in a linear distance of 5 mm., and thus they are much more closely arranged than in the typical form. Among the specimens examined this variety is readily distinguished by its sculpture, the difference being so marked that it seems desirable to discriminate it as a new variety if not as a new species. It may possi- bly be a young stage of C. repert, the only other Pennsylvanian Conu- laria which has been described, although this form tapers more rapidly than C. repert, which has nearly parallel sides. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal- gate quadrangle, Okla. Brachiopoda Reemerella patula sp. nov. Shell rather small for the genus, rarely exceeding 18 mm. in diameter, though in one instance reaching nearly 80mm. Shape slightly oval in some specimens, apparently circular in others. Convexity of dorsal valve low, regular. Apex small, slightly though con- spicuously eccentric, situated about two thirds of a radius from the posterior margin. Outline from the apex to the front slightly curved, so that the shape is not truly conical, being somewhat inflated in the apical portion. Curvature of the ventral valve usually compound, more or less strongly convex over the posterior portion and more or less strongly concave at the front and sides. The prominent portion projects above the reflexed rim. The point of highest convexity is usually well marked and is situated diametri- cally opposite to that of the dorsal valve, or about two thirds of a radius for- ward from the posterior margin. On the slope posterior to the point of greatest elevation the pedicle fissure is situated. It is a conspicuous feature, rather long and narrow, with strongly introverted sides. It extends in mature shells from the point of greatest elevation half way to the posterior margin and is surrounded without interruptions by the characteristic sculpture. The sculpture, as usual, consists of narrow, sharply raised concentric lirse with considerably wider, flattened interspaces, which are also finely striated. The lirzee are somewhat irregular and are probably stronger and more persist- 126 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES ‘ent on the ventral than on the dorsal valve, on which they are often ev2nescent about the margins for a greater or less distance. ‘They vary considerably in different specimens, being more closely arranged in some than in others, occurring from nine to eleven in 8mm. They also vary on the same specimen in proportion to their distance from the apex, and are more crowded on the posterior than on the anterior side; consequently, the measurement given above is a relative one, representing the condition toward the front in well- grown specimens, Exfoliation obliterates much of the concentric marking and instead often brings to view fine radial lines and striw, probably due to setze which projected from the margin of the shell. On the interior, the dorsal valve has a short septum passing longitudinally through the apex, and extending farther on the anterior than the posterior side of it. There are also two symmetrical ridges, straight, parallel and close together for some distance anterior to the apex, rapidly diverging and ‘some- what curved near it, so as partly to surround it. Between the straight ex- tended anterior portion of these arms there is a medium groove which extends backward and graduates into the septum, which has depressed sides. The eurved arm-like markings probably represent the boundary of a line of muscu- lar attachment. In one specimen these lines are, near the apex, distinctly expanded into oval areas, one on each side, each of which is separated by an oblique line of division into two scars. These areas, without much question, are the loci of pairs of muscles. The internal markings of the dorsal valve described above are conspic- uous on most of the specimens examined, which are usually preserved as internal molds. They vary in detail in different examples. This pecu- liar structure seems to be identical with that upon which Hall and Clarke based the subgenus Remerella, and while there may be a little doubt as to whether it is really of subgeneric value, it will, together with the con- figuration, readily distinguish this form from other Pennsylvanian dis- cinoids. Some specimens, especially if incompletely exfoliated, fail to show this structure, however. Remerella patula is rather abundant in the Wewoka formation and usually occurs as dissociated valves in small concretions. Occasionally, however, the two valves are found in conjunction, though usually more or less displaced. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal- gate quadrangle, Okla. Streptorhynchus oklahome sp. nov. There are in the Wewoka collection two specimens which appear to belong to the genus Streptorhynchus. They are preserved as internal molds and show dental callosities in the ventral valve without any trace of a septum. In the dorsal valve, the socket plates are fairly well developed and one specimen has a low dorsal septum. In point of convexity the dorsal valve is only gently GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 127 convex, the ventral rather high and more or less contorted. The shell con- tracts at the hinge, the area being moderately high and strongly inclined back- ward. The sculpture consists of fine, regular, subequal lirze (in one specimen more or less distinctly alternating). In the type specimen the lire are equal over the median portion and separated by intervals slightly greater than their own width. Here they occur ten in 5 mm. Toward the sides they are rather more distantly spaced and are alternating. The rarity of this genus in our Pennsylvanian rocks constitutes an @ priori argument against these specimens belonging to Streptorhynchus. On the other hand, it is difficult to understand how the process of fossili- zation, while permitting the dental callosities to be preserved, could oblit- erate all trace of the septum. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla. Chonetes granulifer var. armatus var. nov. The fossils included under this title occur associated with C. mesolobus var. decipiens, and with the more closely related C. granulifer. They are of small size, 15mm. being the maximum width observed, of moderate convexity where not compressed, subquadrate shape, rather prominent beak, and faint though distinct insinuation. About seven cardinal spines occur on each side of the beak. The surface is marked by obsolescent lirze and by numerous small though prominent spines. This variety is distinguished from C. granulifer by the smaller and less projecting beak, the nearly obsolete liration, and the number and prominence of the spines, although the latter character may be to some extent the result of preservation. With the evidence at hand, however, I would not feel justified in regarding these shells as true representatives of C. granulifer. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Coalgate quadrangle, Okla. Chonetes mesolobus var. decipiens var. nov. 1899. Chonetes mesolobus. Girty, U. S. Geol. Survey, Nineteenth Ann. Rept., pt. 3, p. 576. Upper Coal Measures: Atoka quadrangle, Oklahoma. 1903. Chonetes mesolobus. Girty, U. S. Geol. Surv., Prof. Paper 16, p. 357, pl. 1, figs. 20-28. Hermosa formation: San Juan region, Colo. Rico formation: San Juan region, Colo. Maroon formation: Crested Butte district, Colo. Carboniferous: Grand River region, Colo. This form differs from typical C. mesolobus in having a smooth instead of striated surface. Though I was at first disposed to describe it as a new species 128 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES rather than a new variety, the lower taxonomic rank is probably more in ac- cordance with the facts. ; The peculiar configuration of C. mesolobus is known to everyone. The typical form is described as possessing fine, radiating strie. Some well- preserved specimens from Ohio show this feature very clearly. The liree are fine and moderately strong and they give rise to a large number of minute spines, a feature not mentioned by Norwood and Pratten, though it is perhaps represented by one of their figures. Mr. Beede® also ap- pears to record it when he describes the surface as “coarsely punctate.” He may, however, be referring to another and an altogether different feature, to more numerous perforations, which occur between the lire instead of on them and which project as rows of spinules or pustules on the inside of the shell. These are best shown on exfoliated specimens or internal molds. The external feature to which I refer above has, also, when the shell is worn, the appearance of puncte, but when better pre- served, the puncte show projecting edges as of downward pointing spines, very similar to the minute spines which are found on many orthoids. The variety which is the subject of this account has the characteristic configuration of C. mesolobus, but the surface is entirely without radia- ting sculpture, marked only on the best specimens by fine growth lines. The absence of radial striation is not due to erosion or any circumstance of fossilization, for it is a persistent feature shown by an extensive series of specimens from many localities. Furthermore, the radial markings could hardly have been lost, when the more delicate growth lines had been retained. In characteristic specimens, this difference is so strongly marked that one would be led to refer the two forms to altogether different groups, and as already noted, I was at first disposed to regard them as distinct species. When large series of specimens from different horizons are ex- amined, however, individuals more or less intermediate in character are found. That is, associated with the smooth variety are occasional shells which show faint yet unmistakable traces of radial sculpture. Such specimens must be carefully examined, however, to determine whether this character is not adventitious, for under exfoliation the rows of in- ternal spinules which have oblique pores connecting with them form little grooves and produce fine, more or less regular radiating markings. The shells belonging to the smooth variety rarely show traces of the spines found on the other. Except for occasional incremental lines the surface usually appears to be quite featureless. ®§ University Geol. Sury. of Kansas, Rept., vol. VI, p. 71. 1900. GIRTY, THE WEWOKA FORMATION OF OKLAHOMA 129 C. mesolobus var. decipiens is very abundant in the Wewoka forma- tion. It is also abundant in some of the earlier Pennsylvanian deposits of the Kansas section at about the horizon of the Parsons formation. In the literature, no citation can definitely be included in the synonymy except my own identifications of specimens obtained in Oklahoma and in Colorado. I remarked in that connection that the Colorado specimens were characteristic in every way, but I had for comparison not typical, striated CO. mesolobus, but specimens of the present variety. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal- gate quadrangle, Okla. Chonetes mesolobus var. euampygus var. nov. Considerable variation is shown by shells of the mesolobus group in the strength with which the characteristic lobation is developed. In some of the larger individuals especially, it can hardly be distinguished at all, and when, as is usually (?) the case, such specimens belong to the smooth or decipiens type, they simulate C. geinitzianus very closely. It is at least possible that C. geinitzianus may have had this derivation, though one would have said @ priori that such phylogeny was of all the least probable. It is probably true as a general statement, though not without exceptions, that the strength of the lobation varies inversely as the size of the individual. There is at all events a group of shells which stand out strongly and distinctly by reason of their small size and deep lobation. That they are mature shells is indicated by their strong convexity and by the fact that young individuals of the larger form would be more faintly lobed. Though they intergrade with the larger. less strongly lobate shells through larger examples which have an almost equal strength of lobation, they form a distinct, and as a rule an easily discriminated group which sometimes occurs alone to the exciusion of the typical variety. In sculpture, these shells seem to be allied to the variety decipiens. They are usuaily unstriated, but show traces of strive more fre- quently than decipiens. Seldom, if ever, is the striation as strong as in well- characterized specimens of C. mesolobus Ss. Ss. None of the specimens referred here exceeds 10 mm. in width, and the average is nearer 7 mm. Horizon and locality: Wewoka formation; Wewoka quadrangle, Coal- gate quadrangle, Okla. Productus insinuatus sp. nov. 1892. Productus equicostatus. Haiti and CLARKE, Geol. Surv. New York, Pal., vol. 8, pt. 1, pl. 17 A, figs. 22, 28. Coal Measures: Nebraska. 1892. Productus equicostatus. Hatt and CLARKE, State Geologist New York. : Eleventh Ann. Rept., for 1891, pl. 22, figs. 11, 12. Coal Measures: Nebraska. 130 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 1894. Productus wquicostatus. TIALL and CLARKE, “Introduction to Study of Brachiopoda,” pt. 1, pl. 22, figs. 11, 12. 5 Coal Measures: Nebraska. 1900. Productus cora var. americanus. BErEDE, Uniy. Geol. Surv. Kansas, Rept., VOL Gp: Ciguple lilo: Upper and Lower Coal Measures: Kansas City, Eudora, Anderson Co., Ixansas. 1906. Productus cora var. americanus. \VYoooRuFF, Nebraska Geol. Surv., Rept., WAGE AS lis A emery jolly alle ties 2p Carboniferous: Louisville. Nebraska. Shell of the cora type, rather large, widest at the hinge, more or less strongly transverse. In the immature condition, this form closely resembles P. cora itself, being strongly convex and more nearly quadrate. In the later stages, the growth is more spreading, especially at the sides, and the margins are flatter. Two varieties can be distinguished, one which is narrow and more highly arched and the other transverse and less convex. In the mature condi- tion, also, the ventral valve becomes elevated and angular along the median line. Correlated with this character is an inflection of the anterior margin making a deep sinus in the outline. mMunp OtT1s Hovey A LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE GENERA AND SUBGENERA OF FORMICIDA BY Witit1aM Morron WHEELER NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 17 Ocroser, 1911 THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876) OrFicers, 1911 President—FRanz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GerorcE F. Kunz, Frepertc A. Lucas, R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—EpMunp Otis Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—Henry HE. Crampton, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMItttn, 40 Wall Street Inbrarian—RatpexH W. Towser, American Museum SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chatrman—GeEorGE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—Cuar Es P. Berxey, Columbia University SHCTION OF BIOLOGY Chatrman—F reveric A. Lucas, American Museum. Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum SHCTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—Epwarp J. TuHatcuer, Teachers College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chairman—R. S. WoopwortnH, Columbia University Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o'clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West} s were ww FF [Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XXI, pp. 157-175. 17 October, 1911] LIBRARY A LIST OF THE TYPE SPECIES OF THE GENERA AND NEW YORK SUBGENERA OF FORMICIDAt! BOTANICA! GARDEN By Wiiti1AM Morton WHEELER (Presented by title before the Academy, 16 October, 1911) Although at the present time the taxonomy of the Formicide is in much less confusion than that of many other families of Hymenoptera, there is nothing to indicate that this fortunate state of affairs will sur- vive the present generation of conservative myrmecologists. And, as it is very generally conceded that confusion in taxonomy often arises from a failure to recognize generic types, it seems advisable to publish a list of these for the Formicide. This is the more urgent, because Shuckard, Emery and Bingham are almost the only authors who have expressly designated type species of these insects. Being as firmly convinced as Emery and Forel that the subgenus as well as the subspecies and variety is, at least heuristically, a useful and valid category, I have recognized the subgeneric types as such in ‘the following list and have not followed the example of those entomologists who, in similar lists, either ignore the subgeneric category or throw all or most subgeneric names into the synonymy. I have verified nearly all the bibliographic references cited below, but for a few of them from obscure and antiquated sources I have had to rely on Dalla Torre’s “Catalogus Hymenopterorum.” The list of genera and subgenera both living and fossil is, I believe, complete up to June, 1911. Acamatus Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital. XXVI, p. 184. 1894. (Subgenus of Eciton.) Type: Hciton (Acamatus) schmitti Emery (by present designation). Acanthognathus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 578. 1887. Type: Acanthognathus ocellatus Mayr (monobasic). Acantholepis Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 42. 1861. Type: Hypoclinea fraucnfeldi Mayr (monobasic). Acanthomyops Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 699. 1862. (Sub- genus of Lasius.) Type: Formica claviyera Roger (by present designation). Acanthomyrmex Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. France, LXI, p. CCLXXYVI. 1892. Type: Acanthomyrmea luciole Kmery (designated by Bingham, 1905). 1Contributions from the Hntomological Laboratory of the Bussey Institution, Harvard University, No. 40. (157) 158 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Acanthoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 732. 1862. Type: Ponera mucronata Roger (by present designation). Acanthostichus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX XVII, p. 549. 1887. Type: Typhlopone serratula IF. Smith (monobasic). Acrocelia Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver Wien, II, p. 146. 1852. (= Cremasto- gaster.) Type: Acrocelia ruficeps Mayr (=Cremastogaster scutellaris Oliv.). Acromyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 88. 1865. (Subgenus of Atta.) Type: Formica hystrix Latreille (= Formica octospinosa Reich). Acropyga Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 242. 1862. Type: Acropyga acutiventris Roger (monobasic). Acrostigma HMrry. Mem. Accad. Sci. Bologna, (5) I, p. 575. 1891. Type: Acrostigma mayri Emery (monobasic). Acrostigma Foret. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 477. 1902. (=Stigmacros; Sub- genus of Acantholepis.) ; Type: Acantholepis (Acrostigma)froggatti Forel (first of four species by present designation ). Adelomyrmex Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XX, p. 590. 1987. Type: Adelomyrmez biroi Emery (monobasic). Adlerzia Foret. Rev. Suisse Zool., X, p. 445. 1902. (Subgenus of Mono- morium. ) Type: Monomorium (Adlerzia) froggatti Forel, (monobasic). 4Bnictogiton Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XX XIII, p. 49. 1901. Type: Ainictogiton fossiceps Emery (monobasic). 4Bnictus SHucKARD. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., V, p. 266. 1840. Type: Anictus ambiguus Shuckard (designated by Shuckard, 1840). Aéromyrma TorEL. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 198. 1891. Type: Aéromyrma nosindambo Forel (monobasic). Agrecomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 265. 1910. Type: Myrmica dwisburgi Mayr (monobasic). Alaopone HMery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XVI, p. 274. 1881. (Sub- genus of Dorylus.) Type: Alaopone oberthueri Emery = Dorylus orientalis Westwood (de- signated by Emery, 1910).? Alfaria EMrery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXVIII, p. 9. 1896. Type: Alfaria simulans Emery (monobasic). Allomerus Mayr. Verh. zoo]. bot. Ges. Wien, XX VII, p. 873. 1877. Type: Allomerus decemarticulatus Mayr (by present designation). Amblyopone EricHson. Arch. f. Naturg., VIII, p. 260. 1841. Type: Amblyopone australis Erichson (monobasic). Ancylognathus Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 121. 1831. (= Eciton.) Type: Ancylognathus lugubris Lund = ? Eciton lugubre F. Smith. Aneleus Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XXIII, p. 327. 1900. (Subgenus of Pheidologeton. ) Type: Solenopsis similis Mayr (monobasic). 1 Ashmead, 1906, gives A. carteri Shuckard as the type, but this is evidently a mis- print for curtisi, which is a synonym of D. orientalis. LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 159 Anergates ForeL. Denkschr. Schweiz Ges. Naturw., XXVI, pp. 29, 33, 35, 93. 1874. Type: Myrmica atratula Schenck (monobasic). Aneuretus HMeRy. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. 241. 1893. Type: Aneuretus simoni Emery (monobasic). Anochetus Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 538. 1861. Type: Odontomachus ghilianii Spinola (designated by Bingham, 1903). Anomma SHuUCKARD. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., V, p. 826. 1840. (Subgenus of Dorylus.) Type: Anomma burmeisteri Shuckard = Dorylus nigricans Illiger (desig- nated by Shuckard, 1840). Aphenogaster Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, III, p. 107. 1855. Type: Aphenogaster sardoa Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1905). Aphomomyrmex HMerRy. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLII, p. 493. 1899. Type: Aphomonyrmex afer Emery (by present designation). Apsychomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 261. 1910. Type: Apsychomyrmex myops Wheeler (monobasic). Apterostigma Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., pp. 25 and 111. 1865. Type: Apterostigma pilosum Mayr (monobasic). Arotropus PRovANCHER. Natural. Canad., XII, p. 205. 1881. (=WStigma- tomma.) Type: Arotropus binodosus Proyancher = Stigmatomma pallipes Halde- man (monobasic). Asemorhoptrum Mayr. Hurop. Formicid., p. 71. 1861. (= Stenamma.) Type: Asemorhoptrum lippulum Mayr = Stenamma westwoodi Westwood (monobasic). Atopogyne Foret. Bull. Soc. Vand. Sci. Nat. (5) XLVII, p. 342. 1911. (Sub- genus of Cremuastoguster. ) Type: Cremastogaster (Atopogyne) hellenica Forel (By present designa- tion). Atopomyrmex Ern. ANDRE. Rey. d’Entom., VIII, p. 226. 1889. Type: Atopomyrmex mocquerysi Ern, André (monobasic). Atta Fapricius. System. Piez., p. 421. 1804. Type: Formica cephalotes Linn (first species by present designation). Attopsis Hrer. Denksch. Schweiz. Ges. Naturw., X, p. 155. 1850. Type: Attopsis longipennis Heer (first species by present designation). Azteca Foret. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XV, p. 384. 1878. Type: Tapinoma instabilis KF. Smith = Liometopum ? canthochrowm Roger (designated). Basiceros SCHULZ, nom. nov. for Ceratobasis F. SMITH nom, pre@occ. Spolia. Hymenopt., p. 156. 1906. Type: Meranoplus singularis F. Smith (monobasic). Belonopelta Mayr. Sitzbr. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LXI, p. 394. 1870. Type: Belonopelta attenuata Mayr (monobasic). Bondroitia Foret. Bull. Soc. Vand. Sci. Nat. (5) XLVII, p. 3898. 1911. (Sub- genus of Diplomorium.) Type: Diplomorium (Bondroitia) luje Forel. (First of two species, by present designation.) 160 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Bothriomyrmex HmMery. Ann. Mus. Zool. Univ. Napoli, V, p. 117. 1865 (1869). — Type: Bothriomyrmex costae Emery = Tapinoma meridionale Roger (mono- basic). Bothroponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 717. 1862. (Sub- genus of Pachycondyla). Type: Ponera pumicosa Roger (designated by Emery, 1901). Brachymyrmex Mayr. Ann. Soc., Nat. Modena, III, p. 163. 1868. Type: Brachymyrmex patayonicus Mayr (monobasic). Brachyponera Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 43. 1901. (Subgenus of Huponera.) Type: Ponera sennaarensis Mayr (designated by Emery, 1901). Bradoponera Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 73. 1868. Type: Bradoponera meieri Mayr (monobasic). Calomyrmex HMery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, D: Wi. 895: Type: Formica levissima F. Smith (by present designation ). Calyptites Scupprr. Rep. Progr. Geol. Surv. Canada for 1877. DeeniOs Type: Calyptites antediluviana Scudder (monobasic). Calyptomyrmex Mery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXV, p. 472. 1887. Type: Calyptomyrmex beccarii Emery (monobasic). Campomyrma WHEELER. Science, n. s., XXXIII, p. 860. 1911. (Subgenus of Myrma.) Type: Polyrhachis clypeata Mayr (designated by Wheeler, 1911). Camponotus Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 35. 1861. Type: Formica ligniperda Latreille (designated by Bingham, 1903). Camptognatha Westwoop. Griffith. Anim. Kingd., XV, 5, p. 16. 1832. (= Eciton.) Type: Formica hamata Fabricius (monobasic). Cardiocondyla Emery. Ann. Acc. Asp. Nat. Naples, Era 2, II, p. 20. 1869. Type: Cardiocondyla elegans Wmery (monobasic). Carebara WrEstwoop, Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 86. 1841. Type: Carebara lignata Westwood (monobasic). Carebarella Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXXVII, p. 137. 1905. Type: Carebarella bicolor Wmery (monobasic). Cataglyphis Forster. Verh. Naturh. Ver. Preuss. Rheinl., VII. p. 493. 1850. (Subgenus of Myrmecocystus. ) Type: Formica megalocola Forster (worker); Cataglyphis fairmairi Forster (male) (mauobasic). Cataulacus F. SmirH. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, (2) II, p. 225. 1853. Type: Cataulacus taprobane F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903). Centromyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XVI, p. 894. 1866. Type: Centromyrmer bohemanni Mayr (monobasic). Cephalotes LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., III, p. 387. 1802. (= Atta.) Type: Formica cephalotes Linné. Cephaloxys F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., VIII, p. 76. 1864. (= Strumigenys. ) Type: Cephalorys capitata F. Smith (monobasic). Cerapachys F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., II, p. 74. 1857. Type: Cerapachys antennatus F. Smith (monobasic). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDEA 161 Ceratobasis Ff. SmirH. Journ. of Entom., I, p. 78. 1861. (= Basiceros.) Type: Meranoplus singularis F. Smith (monobasic). Ceratopheidole PERGANDE. Proc. Calif. Acad. Sci., (2) V, p. 889. 1895. (Sub- genus of Pheidole.) Type: Pheidole (Ceratophcidole) granulata Pergande (monobasic). Champsomyrmex HMery. Ann. Soc. Hnt. France, LX, p. 558, nota. 1891. Type: Odontomachus coquereli Roger (monobasic). Cheliomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX, p. 968. 1870. Type: Cheliomyrmex nortoni Mayr (monobasic). Colobopsis MAyr. Europ. Formicid, p. 38. 1861. (Subgenus of Camponotus.) Type: Formica truncata Spinola. Condylodon Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 131. 1831. (= Pseudomyrma.) Type: Condylodon audouini Lund. Cosmacetes SprnoLaA. Mem. Accad. Torino, (2) XIII, p. 70. 1851. (= Typhlopone.) Type: Cosmacetes omalinus Spinola = Typhlopone fulva Westwood. Cratomyrmex HMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. 572. 1892. Type: Cratomyrmex regalis Emery (monobasic). Cremastogaster Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 132. 1831. Type: Formica scutellaris Olivier (designated by Bingham, 1903). Cryptocerus LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Ins., XIII, p. 260. 1805. Type: Formica atrata Linné (monobasic). Cryptopone Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. France, LXI, p. CCLXXYV. 1892. Type: Amblyopone ? testacea Motschulsky (monobasic). Ctenopyga ASHMEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 382. 1905. Type: Ctenopyga townsendi Ashinead (designated by Ashmead, 1905). Cylindromyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XX, p. 967. 1870. Type: Cylindromyrmex striatus Mayr (monobasic). Cyphomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 690. 1862. Type: Cryptocerus ? rimosus Spinola (by present designation ). Cysias Emery. Rend. Accad. Sci. Bologna, n. s., VI, p. 24. 1902. (Subgenus of Cerapachys.) Type: Cerapachys papuanus Emery (designated by Emery, 1902). Daceton Perry. Delect. Animal Artic. Brasil, p. 136. 1833. Type: Formica armigera Latreille (monobasic). Dacryon Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 421. 1895. Type: Dacryon omniparens Forel (monobasic). Decacrema Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIV, p. 18. 1910. (Subgenus of Cremastogaster. ) Type: Cremastogaster schencki Forel (by present designation). Decamera Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 166. 1863. (= Myrmelachista.) Type: Decamera nigella Roger (monobasic). Dendromyrmex Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 772. 1895. Type: Camponotus chartifex F. Smith (by present designation). Diacamma Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 718. 1862. Type: Ponera rugosa Le Guillon (designated by Bingham, 1903). Dichothorax Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 323. 1894. (Sub- genus of Leptothoraz.) Type: Leptothorar (Dichothorar) pergandei Emery (first of two species by present designation). 162 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Dichthadia GrerstAcker. Stettin. Ent. Zeitg., XXIV, p. 693. 1868. (Subgenus of Dorylus.) Type: Dichthadia glaberrima Gerstiicker = Dorylus levigatus EF. Smith (monobasic ).? Dicroaspis EMrry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIT, p. 184. 1908. Type: Dicroaspis cryptocera Wmery (monobasic). Dilobocondyla Santrscui. Le Naturaliste, XXXII, p. 283. 1910. Type: Atopomyrimex selebensis Emery (by present designation). Dimorphomyrmex Hrn. ANDRE. Mem. Soc. Zool. France, V, p. 49. 1892. Type: Dimorphomyrmez janeti Ern. André (monobasic). Dinomyrmex ASHMEAD. Canad. HEntom., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. (—=Cam- ponotus. ) Type: Formica gigas Latreille (designated by Ashmead, 1905). Dinoponera RoegEr. Berlin. Wnt. Zeitschr., V, p. 37. 1861. Type: Ponera grandis Guérin (monobasic). Diplomorium Mayr. Ann. K. K. Naturhist. Hofmus, XVI, p. 16. 1907. Type: Diplomorium longipenne Mayr (monobasic). Diplorhoptrum Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 449. 1855. (= Solenopsis. ) Type: Formica fugaxr Latreille (monobasic). Discothyrea Rocrr. Berlin. Wnt. Zeitsehr., VII, p. 176. 1868. Type: Discothyrea testacea Roger (monobasic). Doleromyrma Foren. Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungar., V, p. 28. 1907. (Subgenus of Tapinoma. ) Type: Vapinoma (Doleromyrma) darwiniana Forel (monobasic). Dolichoderus Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 1380. 1831. Type: Dolichoderus attelaboides Lund (monobasic). Dorylus Fasricius. Hnt. Syst., Il, pp. 194 and 365. 1793. Type: Vespa helvola Linné (designated by Shuckard, 1840). Dorymyrmex Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 494. 1866. Type: Formica flavescens Fabricius (monobasic). Drepanognathus F. SmirH. Catal. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 81. 1858. Type: Harpegnathus saltator Jerdon (designated by Bingham, 1908). Echinopla I. Smira. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., 11, p. 79. 1857. Type: Hehinopla melanarctos F. Smith (first species by present designa- tion). ’ Eciton LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Ins., IV, p. 130. 1802. Type: Formica hamata Fabricius (designated by Emery, 1910). Ecphorella Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIII, p. 65. 1909. (Subgenus of Tapinoma. ) Type: Hephorella wellmani Forel (monobasic). Ectatomma I’. Smira. Cat. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 102. 1858. Type: Formica tuberculata Oliver (designated by Bingham, 1903). Ectomomyrmex Mayr. Tijdscr. v. Ent, X, p. 83. 1867. (Subgenus of Pachycondyla. ) Type: Ectomomyrmer javanus Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1903). 4 Not D. furcata, as stated by Ashmead, 1906. LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 163 Electromyrmex WHEELER. Ants, their Struct., Develop. and Behav., p. 164. 1910. Type: Electromyrmex klebsi Wheeler (monobasic). Emeryella Foren. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 334, 1901. Type: Emeryella schmitti Forel (monobasic). Emeryia Foret. C. R. Soc. Ent: Belg., p. CX. 1890. (== Cardiocondyla.) Type: Emeryia wroughtoni Forel (monobasic). Engramma Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLIX, p. 180. 1905. Type: Engramma luje Forel (monobasic). Enneamerus Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 98. 1868. Type: Hnneamerus reticulatus Mayr (monobasic). Ephebomyrmex WHEELER. Psyche, IX, p. 890. 1902. (Subgenus of Pogono- myrmenx. ) Type: Pogonomyrmex negelii Forel (by present designation). Epeecus PMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, V, C. R., p. XXLXXVI. 1892; Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 272. 1894. Type: Epecus pergandei Emery (monobasic). Epipheidole WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XX, p. 14. 1904. Type: Epipheidole inquilina Wheeler (monobasic). Epitritus Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., I, p. 136. 1869. Type: Epitritus argiolus Emery (monobasic). Epixenus Emery. Deutsch. Ent. Zeitschr., p. 556. 1908. Type: Epixenus andrei Emery = “abnormal female” of J/onomoriwm venustum Ern. André (first of two species by present designation ). Epopostruma Foren. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XX XIX, p. 422. 1895. (Subgenus of Strumigenys.) Type: Strumigenys (Epopostruma) quadrispinosa Forel (first of two species by present designation). Erebomyrma WHEELER. Biol. Bull., IV, p. 188. 1903. Type: Hrebomyrma longi Wheeler (monobasic). Escherichia Foret. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., XXIX, p. 245. 1910. Type: Escherichia brevirostris Forel (monobasic). Eumecopone Forri. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 335. 1901. (Subgenus of Neoponera.) Type: Neoponera (Euwmecopone)agilis Forel (monobasic). Euponera Foret. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 126. 1891. Type: Ponera sikore Forel (monobasic). Euprenolepis EmMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., L, p. 134. 1906. (Subgenus of Prenolepis.) Type: Prenolepis procera Wmery (designated by Emery, 1906). Eusphinctus Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, p. CCLXXV. 1892. (Subgenus of Sphinctomyrmez.) Type: Eusphinctus furcatus Emery (monobasic). Eutetramorium Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital.. XX XI, p. 281. 1899. Type: Hutetramorium mocquerysi Emery (first of two species by present designation). Forelius Emery. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., XLVI, p. 389. 1888. Type: Iridomyrmex maccooki Forel (monobasic). 164 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Formica LInN&. System. Nat., Hd. 10, p. 579. 1758. Type: Formica rufa Linné (designated by Bingham, 1905).. Formicina SHUCKARD. Swainson & Shuckard’s Hist. Nat. Arrang. of Insects, p. 172. 1840. (= Formica.) Type: Formica rufa Linné (by present designation). Formicoxenus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 418. 1855. Type: Myrmica nitidula Nylander (monobasic). Froggattella Foren. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 459. 1902. Type: Acautholepis kirbyi Lowne = Hypoclinea kirbyi Mayr (monobasic). Gesomyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 50. 1868. Type: Gesomyrmex hornesi Mayr (monobasic). Gigantiops Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 287. 1862. Type: Formica destructor Fabricius (monobasic). Glyptomyrmex Toren. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 865. .1884. (= Myrmicocrypta. ) Type: Glyptomyrmex dilaceratus Forel (monobasic). Gnamptogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 174. 18638. (Subgenus of Hetatomma.) Type: Ectatomma cincinnum Mayr (by present designation). Goniomma Emery. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., VIII, p. 298. 1895. Type: Aphenogaster blanci Hrn. André (monobasic). Gonicthorax Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XXVIII, p. 26. 1896. (Subgenus of Leptothora.) Type: Leptothorax vicinus Mayr (by present designation). Hagensia Foren. Rey. Suisse Zool., IX, p. 3338. 1901. (Subgenus of Mega- ponera. ) Type: JZegaloponera (Hagensia) havilandi Forel (monobasic). Hagiomyrma WHEELER. Science n. s.. XXXIII, p. 860. 1911. (Subsenus of Myrma.) Type: Formica anmon Fabricius (designated by Wheeler, 1911). Hagioxenus Forer. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., LIV, p. 8. 1910. Type: Hagiorenus schmitzi Forel (monobasic). Harpagoxenus ForeL. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg.. XXXVII, p. 167. 1893. Nom. nov. for Tomognathus Mayr, nom. praocce. 1861. Type: Tomognathus sublevis Nylander (monobasic). Harpegnathus Jerpon. Madras Journ. Litt. and Sci., XVII, p. 116. 1851. (= Drepanognathus. ) Type: Drepanognathus cruentatus Smith = Harpegnathus saltator Jerdon (by present designation). Hemioptica Rocrer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 238. 1862. (Subgenus of Myrima.) Type: Hemioptica scissa Roger (monobasic). Heptacondylus F. Smirn. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 141. 1858. (= Myrmicaria. ) Type: Heptacondylus subcarinatus F. Smith = Myrmica fodiens Jerdon (first of three species by presert designation). Heteroponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 532. 1887. (= Acanthoponera.) Type: Heteroponera carinifrons Mayr (monobasic). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 165 Holcomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVIII, p. 671. 1878. (Subgenus of Monomorium.) Type: Holcomyrmex scabriceps Mayr (designated by Bingham, 1903). Holcoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXXVII, p. 540. 1887. (Sub- genus of Hctatomma.) Type: Ectatomma (Holcoponera) striatulum Mayr (by present designa- tion). Hoplomyrmus GerstAcKer. Monatschr. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, p. 261. 1858. (= Myrma.) Type: Hoplomyrmus schistaceus Gersticker (monobasic). Huberia Foret. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CV. 1890. Type: Tetramorium striatum F. Smith (monobasic). Hypochira Bucktey. Proc. Ent. Soc. Phila., VI, p. 169, 1866. (= Formica.) Type: Formica (Hypochira) subspinosa Buckley (monobasic). Hypoclinea (F6OrsTeR) Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 877. 1855. (Subgenus of Dolichoderus.) Type: Formica quadripunctata Linné (second species by present designa- tion). Hypopomyrmex. Emery. Mem. Accad. Sci. Bologna, (5) I, p. 574. 1891. Type: Hypopomyrmex bombiccii Emery (monobasic). Imhoffia Heer. Verh. Schweiz. Naturf. Ges., p. 78. 1849. Type: IJmhofia nigra Weer (monobasic). Iridomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 702. 1862. Type: Formica detecta F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903). Ischnomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 788. 1862. (Sub- genus of Aphmnogaster.) Type: Myrmica longipes F. Smith (monobasic). Janetia Foret. Biol. Centr. Amer. Hymen., III, p. 61, nota. 1899. (Subgenus of Pogonomyrmes. ) Type: Pogonomyrmex (Janetia) mayri Forel (monobasic). Labidogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 249. 1862. (= Strumigenys.) Type: Labidogenys lyroessa Roger (monobasic). Labidus JurtInE. Nouv. Meth. Class Hymén., p. 282. 1807. (Subgenus of Eciton.) Type: Labidus latreillei Jarine = male Heiton cecum (Latreille)= Formica ceca Latreille (designated by Shuckard, 1840). Lachnomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist... XXVIII, p. 268. 1910. Type: Lachnomyrmex scrobiculatus Wheeler (monobasic). Lampromyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 93. 1868. Type: Lampromyrmesx gracillimus Mayr (monobasic). Laparomyrmex Emery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova (2), V, p. 87. 1887. (= Liomyrme.) Type: Laparomyrmenx gestroi Emery (monobasic). Lasiophanes Emery. Act. Soc. Sci. Chili, V, p. 16. 1895. (Subgenus of Melophorus. ) Type: Formica nigriventris Spinola (by present designation). Lasius Fapricius. System. Piezat., p. 415. 1804. Type: Formica nigra Linné (designated by Bingham, 1903). 166 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES bee |e ‘ Leptalea (Kiuc) Ertcuson. Arch. f. Naturg., V, p. 309. 1839. (= Pseudo- myrma. ) : Type: Formica gracilis Fabricius (monobasic). Leptanilla Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., II, p. 196. 1870. Type: Leptanilla revelieri Emery (monobasic). Leptogenys Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 41. 1861. Type: Leptogenys falcigera Roger (designated by Bingham, 1903). Leptomyrma Morscuutsky. Bull. Soc. Nat. Mose, XXXVI, p. 17. 1868. (= Pheidole.) Type: Leptomyrma gracilipes Motschulsky (monobasic). Leptomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 695. 1862. Type: Formica erythrocephala Fabricius (monobasic). Leptothorax Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, V, p. 481. 1855. Type: Formica acervorum Fabricius (by present designation). Linepithema Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 496. 1866. Type: Linepithema fuscum Mayr (monobasic). Liometopum Mayr.. Europ. Formicid., p. 38. 1861. ' Type: Formica microcephala Panzer (monobasic). Liomyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 23. 1865. Type: Myrmica caca F. Smith (monobasic). Lioponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVIII, p. 666. 1878. Type: Lioponera longitarsus Mayr (monobasic). Lobopelta Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 733. 1862. (Subgenus of Leptogenys. ) Type: Ponera diminuta F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903). Lonchomyrmex Mayr. Jahrb. Geol. Reichsanst. Wien, XVII, p. 61. 1867. Type: Formica freyeri Heer (monobasic). Lophomyrmex Emery. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXII, p. 114. 1892. Type: Gcodoma quadrispinosa Jerdon (monobasic). Lordomyrma Emery. Termes. Fiizetek, XX, p. 591. 1897. Type: Lordomyrma furcifera Emery (first of two species by present desig- nation). Machomyrma Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 425. 1895. (Subgenus of Liomyrmex.) Type: Liomyrmex (Machomyrma) dispar Forel (monobasic). Macromischa Roerr. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 184. 1863. Type: dJlacromischa purpurata Roger (first species by present designa- tion). Manica JurINeE. Nouy. Méth. Class. Hymén., p. 276. 1807. (= Myrmica.) Type: Formica rubida “Latreille (by present designation). Martia Foren. Ann. Mus. Nat. Hungarici, V, p. 20. 1907. (Subgenus of Monomorium. ) Type: Monomoriwn (Martia) vezenyii Forel (monobasic). Mayria Fore,. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XV, p. 369. 1878. Type: Mayria madagascariensis Forel (monobasic). Mayriella Foret. Rey. Suisse Zool., X, p. 452. 1902. Type: Mayriclla abstinens Forel (monobasic). Mayromyrmex AsHMrEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 381. 1905. (= Hciton.) Type: Labidus fargeaui Shuckard = male Heiton quadriglume Haliday (designated by Ashmead, 1905). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 167 Megalomyrmex Foret. Bull. Soc. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 56. 1884. Type: Formica bituberculuta Fabricius (by present designation). Megaloponera Emery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, IX, p. 368. 1877. (= Megaponera. ) Type: Formica fetens Fabricius (monobasic). Megaponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 734. 1862. Type: Formica fatens Fabricius (monobasic). Melissotarsus Emery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, IX, p. 378. 1877. Type: Melissotarsus beccarii Emery (monobasic). Melophorus LussockK. Journ. Linn. Soc. Zool., XVIII, p. 51. 1883. Type: Melophorus bagoti Lubbock (monobasic). Meranoplus I. SmirH. Trans. Ent. Soe. London, (2) II, p. 224. 1854. Type: Cryptocerus bicolor Guérin (designated by Bingham, 1903). Mesoponera HMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 48. 1901. (Subgenus of Huponera. ) Type: Ponera caffraria F. Smith (designated by Emery, 1901). Mesoxena F. SmirH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soe. Zool., IV, Suppl., p. 106. 1860. Type: Mesorena mistura F. Smith (monobasic). Messor Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIV, C. R., p. LXVIII. 1890. Type: Formica barbara Linné (designated by Bingham, 1903). Micromyrma Durour. Ann. Soc. Ent. France, (2) V, p. 60. 1857. (= Tapi- noma. ) Type: Formica erratica Latreille (monobasic). Mictoponera Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLY, p. 372. 1901. (Subgenus of Ectatomma. ) Type: EHctatomma (Mictoponera) diehli Forel (monobasic). Meellerius ForeL. Ann. Soc. Hnt. Belg., XX XVII, p. 589. 1893. (Subgenus of Atta.) Type: Acromyrmex landolti Forel (by present designation). Monacis Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 233. 1862. (Subgenus of Dolichoderus.) Type: Formica bispinosa Oliv. = Formica fungosa Fabr. (by present designation). Monocombus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 381. 1855. (= Catagly- phis.) Type: Formica viatica Fabricius (monobasic). Monomorium Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ver. Wien, V, p. 452. 1855. Type: Monomorium minutum Mayr (monobasic). Mycetosoritis WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXIII, p. 714. 1907. (Subgenus of Atta.) Type: Atta (Mycetosoritis) hartmani Wheeler (monobasic). Mychothorax Ruzsky. Formica Imp. Rossici, p. 107. 1905. (= Leptothoraz.) Type: Formica acervorum Fabricius (first species by present designa- tion). Mycocepurus Fore,r. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, IV, p. 369. 1893. Type: Mycocepurus smithi Forel (by present designation). Myopias Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 39. 1861. Type: Myopias amblyops Roger (monobasic). Myopopene Rocrer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 49. 1861. Type: Amblyopone castanea F. Smith var. maculata Roger (monobasic). 168 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Myrma Birserc. HEnumer. Insect., p. 104. 1820. Type: Formica militaris Fabricius (by present designation). Myrmecia FApricius. System. Piezat., p. 423. 1804. Type: Formica gulosa Fabricius (by present designation). Myrmecina Curtis. Brit. Entom., IV, p. 226. 1829. Type: Myrmecina latreillei Curtis (monobasic). Myrmecocystus WESMAEL. Bull. Acad. Sci. Brux., V, p. 770. 1838. Type: Myrmecocystus mericanus Wesmael (monobasic). Myrmecopsis F. SmirH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc., VIII, p. 68. 1864. Type: Iyrmecopsis respiciens ¥. Smith (monobasic). Myrmecorhynchus Hrn. ANpRE. Rey. d’Entom, XV, p. 253. 1896. Type: Myrmecorhynchus emeryi Wrn. André (monobasic). Myrmelachista Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 162. 1863. Type: Myrmelachista kraatzi Roger (monobasic). Myrmex GUERIN. Iconogr. Regn. Anim., VII, Insect., p. 428. 1845. (= Pseudo- myrmMad. ) Type: Pseudomyrma (Myrmex) perboscii Guerin. Myrmica LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., IV, p. 131. 1802. Type: Formica rubra Linn (by present designation). Myrmicaria SAUNDERS. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, III, p. 57. 1841. Type: Myrimicaria brunnea Sanders (monobasic). Myrmicocrypta F. SmirH. Journ. of Ent., I, p. 75. 1860. Type: Myrmicocrypta squamosa F. Smith (monobasic). Myrmoteras Fore,. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXVII, p. 607. 1893. Type: Myrmoteras binghami Forel (monobasic). Myrmoxenus Ruzsky. Zool. Jahrb. Abth. f. Syst., XVII, p. 474. 1902. Type: Myrmorenus gordiagini Ruazsky (monobasic). Myrmus ScHENcK. Stettin. Ent. Zeitg., XIV, p. 299. 1853. (= Strongylog- nathus. ) Type: Myrnus emarginatus Schenck = Hciton ? testacewn Schenck (monobasic). Mystrium Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 245. 1862. Type: Mystriwmn mysticum Roger (monobasic). Neoponera EMeEry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLV, p. 40. 1901. Type: Formica villosa Fabricius (designated by Emery, 1901). Nesomyrmex WHEELER. Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., XXVIII, p. 259. 1910. Type: Nesomyrmex clavipilis Wheeler (monobasic). Notoncus Emery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 352. 1895. Type: Camponotus ectatommoides Forel (monobasic). Nycteresia Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., V, p. 21. 1861. (= Ecitton.) Type: Nycteresia ceca Roger = Formica ceca Vatreille (monobasic). Nylanderia EuMery. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., L. p. 134. 1906. (Subgenus of Prenolepis.) Type: Prenolepis vividula Nylander (designated by Emery, 1906). Ochetomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XXVII, p. 871. 1877. Type: Ochetomyrmex semipolitus Mayr (monobasic). Ocymyrmex Emery. Bull. Soc. Ent. Ital., XVIII, p. 364. 1886. Type: Ocymyrmex barbiger Emery (monobasic). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 169 Odontomachus Larremiir. Hist. Nat. Crust. et Insect., 1V, p. 128. 1802. Type: Formica hamatoda Linné (monobasic). Odontomyrmex ErRN. ANDRE. Rev. d’Entom., XXIII, p. 207. 1904. Type: Odontomyrmex quadridentatus Ern, André (monobasic). Odontoponera Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 717. 1862. Type: Ponera denticulata F. Smith = Ponera transversa FP. Smith (mono- basic). Ccodoma LATREILLE. Nouv. Dict. Hist. Nat., XXIII, p. 50. 1818. (= Atta.) Type: Formica cephalotes Linné (by present designation). Ccophthora Herr. Hausameise Madeiras, p. 15. 1852. (= Pheidole.) Type: @eophthora pusilla Heer = Formica megacephala Fabricius (mono- basic). Ccophylla F. SmirH. Journ.-Linn. Soc. Zool., V, p. 101. 1861. Type: Formica virescens Fabricius (designated by Bingham, 1903). Oligomyrmex Mayr. Tydscr. v. Hnt., X, p. 110. Type: Oligomyrmex concinnus Mayr (nonobasic). Onychomyrmex Hmerry. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXNLX, p. 549. 1895. Type: Onychomyrmex hedleyi Wmery (monobasic). Odcereza Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 248. 1862. (Subgenus of Cera- pachys. ) Type: Odcerwa fragosa Roger (monobasic). Ophthalmopone Toren. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CXII. 1890. Type: Ophthalmopone vberthoudi Forel (monobasic). Opisthopsis Emery. Ann. Soc. Hnt. Belg., XXXIX, p. 353. 1895. Vom. nov. for Myrmecopsis noi. preoce. Type: Myrmecopsis respiciens EF. Smith (monobasic). Orectognathus I’. Smiru.: ‘Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., (2) I, p. 227. 1854. Type: Orectognathus antenmatus F. Smith (monobasic). Orthonotomyrmex ASHMEAD. Vroc. Wnt. Soc. Wash., VIII, D. 31. 1906. Nov. nom. for Orthonotus nom. proce. (—=Camponotis.) Type: Formica sericea Fabricius (designated by Ashmead, 1905). Orthonotus ASHMEAD. Canad. Ent., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. Nom. proce. (= Orthonotomyrmex = Camponotus. ) Type: Formica sericea Fabricius (designated by Ashmead, 1905). Otomyrmex Foret. Grandidier’s Hist. Madagascar, XX, p. 147. 1891. (Sub- genus of Cataulacus. ) Type: Cataulacus oberthueri Wmery (monobasic). Oxygyne Foren. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 376. 1901. (Subgenus of Cremastogaster. ) Type: Cremastogaster (Oxygyne) daisyi Forel (by present desiguation). Oxyopomyrmex Hrn. ANpDR&. Ann. Soc. Hnt. France, V, p. 72. 1880. Type: Oxyopomyrmex oculatus Ern. André (monobasic). Pachycondyla F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 105. 1858. Type: Formica crassinoda Latreille (designated by Emery, 1901). Pedalgus Foren. Hscherich’s Termitenleben auf Ceylon, p. 217. 1911. Type: Pedalgus escherichi Forel (monobasic). Paltothyreus Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 735. 1862. Type: Formica tarsata Fabricius (monobasic). 170 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Paraponera F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 100. 1858. Type: Formica clavata Fabricius (monobasic). Parasyscia EMery. In Ern. André, Spec. Hymén. Europ., II, p. 235. 1882. (Subgenus of Cerapachys.) Type: Parasyscia piochardi Emery (monobasic). Paratrechina MorscHutsky. Bull. Soc. Nat. Moscou, XXXVI, p. 15. 1865. (= Prenolepis.) Type: Paratrechina currens Motschulsky = Formica longicornis Latreille (monobasic). Pedetes BERNSTEIN. Verh, zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XI, Sitzb., p. 7. 1861. (= Odontonachus.) Type: Pedetes macrorhynchus Bernstein (nomen nudum). Phacota Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 260. 1862. Type: Phacota sicheli Roger (monobasic). Phasmomyrmex Sritz. Mittheil. Zool. Mus. Berlin, V, p. 146. 1910. = Cam- ponotus. ) Type: Phasmomyrmea sericeus Stitz = Camponotus buchneri Forel. Pheidolacanthinus F. Smiru. Journ.-Linn. Soc. Zool., VIII, p. 75. 1864. Type: Pheidolacanthinus armatus F. Smith (monobasic). Pheidole Westwoop. Ann. Mag. Nat. Hist., VI, p. 87. 1841. Type: Atta providens Sykes (designated by Bingham, 1905). Pheidologeton Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 750. 1862. Type: Pheidole ocellifera F. Smith = Gicodoma diversa Jerdon (desig- nated by Bingham, 1903). Phyracaces HMery. Rend. Accad. Sci. Ist. Bologna, n. s., VI, p. 258. 1902. (Subgenus of Cerapachys.) Type: Cerapachys mayri Forel (designated by Emery, 1902). Physatta F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymen. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 171. 1858. (= Myrmi- caria.) Type: Physatta dromedarius F. Smith = Heptacondylus carinatus F. Smith (first of four species by present designation). Plagiolepis Mayr. Hurop. Formicid., p. 42. 1861. Type: Formica pygmea Latreille (monobasic). Platythyrea Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 172. 1865. Type: Pachycondyla punctata F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903). Plectroctena F. SmirH. Catalog. Hymén. Brit. Mus., VI, p. 102. 1858. Type: Plectroctena mandibularis F. Smith = Formica caffra (Klug) Spinola (monobasic). Podomyrma F. SmiruH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., IIT, p. 185. 1858. Type: Podomyrma femorata FP. Smith (first species, by present designa- tion). Pogonomyrmex Mayr. Annu. Soc. Nat. Modena, III, p. 169. 1868. Type: Formica badia Latreille (by present designation). Polyergus LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. Insect., XIII, p. 256. 1805. Type: Formica rufescens Latreille (monobasic). Polyrhachis F. SmitH. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Zool., II, p. 58. 1858. (Sub- genus of Myrma.) Type: Formica bihamata Drury (designated by Smith, 1858). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDAI 171 Ponera LATREILLE. Hist. Nat. Crust. Insect., IV, p. 128. 1802. Type: Formica coarctata Latreille (monobasic). Poneropsis Herr. Denkschr. Schweiz. Ges. Naturw., XXII, p. 19. 1867. Type: Ponera fuliginosa Heer (by present designation). Prenolepis Mayr. Europ. Formicid., p. 52. 1861. Type: Prenolepis imparis Say (designated by Hmery, 1906) .% Prionogenys HMrRy. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 348. 1895. Type: Prionogenys podenzanai Emery (monobasic). Prionomyrmex Mayr. Beitr. Naturk. Preuss., I, p. 77. 1868. Type: Prionomyrmex longiceps Mayr (monobasic). Prionopelta Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 5038. 1866. Type: Prionopelta punctulata Mayr (monobasic). Pristomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot.. Ges. Wien, XVI, p. 903. 1866. Type: Pristomyrmex pungens Mayr (monobasic). Probolomyrmex Mayr. Ann. K. K. Naturhist. Hofmus. Wien, XVI, p. 2. 1901. Type: Probolomyrmex filiformis Mayr (monobasic). Proceratium Roger. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VII, p. 171. 1863. Type: Proceratium silaceum Roger (monobasic). Procryptocerus HMrErRy. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genova, XXV, p. 470 nota. 1887. Type: Meranoplus striatus F. Smith (by present designation). Proformica Ruzsky. Hore Soc. Ent. Ross., XXXVI, p. 303. 1903. (Subgenus of Formica.) Type: Formica nasuta Nylander (by present designation ). Prolasius ForeL. Mittheil. Schweiz. Ent. Ges., VIII, p. 332. 1892. (Subgenus of Melophorus.) Type: Formica advena F. Smith (monobasic). Propodomyrma WHEELER. Ants, their Struct. Devel. & Behay., p. 163. 1910. Type: Propodomyrma samlandica Wheeler (monobasic). Psalidomyrmex HrRn. ANDRE. Rev. d’Ent., VIII, p. 313. 1890. Type: Psalidomyrmex foveolatus Ern. André (monobasic). Pseudodichthadia Ern. ANpRE. Suppl. Spéc. Formic. d’Europ., p. 6. 1885. (= Labidus.) Type: Pseudodichthadia incerta Krn. André = female Formicu ceca Latreille (monobasic). Pseudolasius HMrery. Ann. Mus. Civ. Stor. Nat. Genov., XXIV, p. 244. 1886. Type: Fornica familiaris F. Smith (designated by Bingham, 1903). Pseudomyrma Lunp. Ann. Sci. Nat., XXIII, p. 187. 1831. Type: Formica gracilis Fabricius. Pseudoponera HMerRy. Ann. Soc. Wnt. Belg., XLV, p. 42. 1901. (Subgenus of Huponera. ) Type: Ponera amblyops Emery (designated by Hmery, 1901). Pyramica Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., VI, p. 251. 1862. (= Strumigenys.) Type: Pyramica gundlachi Roger; worker only (monobasic). Rhinomyrmex Foren. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXX, p. 192. 1886. Type: Rhinomyrmex klasi Forel (monobasic). 3 Bingham (1903) had previously designated P. nitens Mayr as the type, but this is merely a European form of P. imparis. 174 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Tetrogmus Rocer. Berlin. Ent. Zeitschr., I, p. 10. 1857. (Subgenus of Tetramorium.) : Type: Tetrogmus caldarius Roger = Myrmica simillima (Nylander) F. Smith (monobasic). Thaumatomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, MOO jase, asl Type: Thaumatomyrmer mutilatus Mayr (monobasic). Tomognathus Mayr. Europ. Formic., p. 56. 1861. (=Harpagorenus. ) Type: Myrmica sublevis Nylander (monobasic). Trachymyrmex Forrey. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXVII, p. 600. 1892. (Sub- genus of Atta.) Type: Atta septentrionalis McCook (by present designation). Tranopelta Mayr. Sitzb. Akad. Wiss. Wien, LIII, p. 514. 1866. Type: Tranopelta gilva Mayr (monobasic). Trapeziopelta Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 715. 1862. Type: Ponera maligna F. Smith (monobasic). Trichomyrmex Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 19. 1865. Type: Trichomyrmex rogeri Mayr (monobasic). Trichoscapa Emery. Ann. Accad. Nat. Napoli, (2) II, p. 24. 1869. (= Strumi- genys.) Type: Trichoscapa membranifera Emery (monobasic). Triglyphothrix Foren. ©. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CVI. 1890. Type: Triglyphothrix walshi Forel (monobasic). Trigonogaster ForeL. C. R. Soc. Ent. Belg., p. CIX. 1890. Type: Triglyphothrix walshi Forel (monobasic). Turneria Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XXXIX, p. 419. 1895. Type: Turneria bidentata Forel (monobasic). Typhlatta F. Smiru. Journ. Proc. Linn. Soc. Lond., II, p. 79. 1857. (= Ainictus.) Type: Typhlatta leviceps F. Smith (monobasic). Typhlomyrmex Gistrr. Myster. Europ. Insectenwelt, p. 447. 1856. Type: Myrmica typhlops (nomen nudum). Typhlomyrmex Mayr. Verh. zool. bot. Ges. Wien, XII, p. 736. 1862. Type: Typhlomyrmex rogenhoferi Mayr (monobasic). Typhlopone Westwoop. Introd. Mod. Classif. Ins., II, p. 219. 1840. (Sub- genus of Dorylis.) Type: Typhlopone fulva Westwood (designated by Emery, 1895). Vollenhovia Mayr. Novara Reise Formicid., p. 21. 1865. Type: Vollenhovia punctatostriata Mayr (monobasic). Wasmannia Foret. Trans. Ent. Soc. London, IV, p. 388. 1893. Type: Tetramorium auropunctatum Roger (first of two species by present designation). Wheeleria Foret. Ann. Soc. Ent. Belg., XLIX,. p. 171. 1908. (= Wheeieriella.) Type: Wheeleria santschii Forel (monobasic). Wheeleriella Foren. Intern. Se. Rev., IV, p. 145. 1907. Nom. nov. for Wheeleria, nom. proce. Type: Wheeleria santschii Forel (monobasic). Xenomyrmex Foren. Bull. Soe. Vaud. Sci. Nat., (2) XX, p. 369. 1884. Type: Xenomyrmesx stolli Forel (monobasic). LIST OF TYPE SPECIES OF FORMICIDA 175 Xiphomyrmex Fore,. Mittheil. Schweiz. Wnt. Ges., VII, p. 385. 1887. (Sub- genus of T'etramoriwm.) Type: Tetramorium (Xiphomyrmex) kelleri Forel (by present designa- tion). Zacryptocerus ASHMEAD,. Canad. HEnt., XXXVII, p. 384. 1905. (=Crypto- cerus.) Type: Cryptocerus multistrigus ¥. Smith (designated by Ashmead, but no such species exists) .* *TI believe this name must be a clerical error for OC. clypeatus Fabr., as Ashmead some years ago gave me a specimen of this ant labeled ‘‘Zacryptocerus.”’ rt a ; “a a Ja is ‘ine eT iagtt haa, rat ea) yet j ie “fy A ; ; ; ; mavens aie ss, Wey =) ¥ Mi ’ Tae ‘ F Vee Wy PA oN ane | ) >a hs , ' . g - } ~~ Xs , a he are tye. oF a . PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876) The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. : (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec- ords of meetings and similar matter. A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus- trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the Academy. The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume t is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zoélogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued. | All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to THe LIBRARIAN, New York Academy of Sciences, care of American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Vol. XXI, pp. 177-183 Editor, EomunD OTIs HovrEy THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE BY FRANz Boas NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 20 Marcu, 1912 THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lycrum or NaturaL History, 1817-1876) | OFFICERS, 1911 President—FRANz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GrorcE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas, R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—Epmunpb Otis Hovey, American Museum ° Corresponding Secretary—Heunry E. Crampron, American Museum Treasurer—Emerson McMiIttrn, 40 Wall Street Iibrarian—Ratpu W. Tower, American Museum SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chairman—GrorceE F. Kunz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—CuHar es P. BerKEy, Columbia University SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—Freperic A. Lucas, American Museum. Secretary—L. Hussaxor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—Epwarp J. THatTcHeER, Teachers College SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND. PSYCHOLOGY ‘Chairman—R. 8. WoopwortH, Columbia University Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. 1912 JUL S [Annats N. Y. Acap. Sct., Vol. XX1, pp.177-183. 20 March, 1912.] THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE.? By Franz Boas. LaDIES AND GENTLEMEN:—The custom which demands that your President address you at the time of the annual meeting—not when the Academy is in formal session, but when seated around the hospitable board—lays upon him a difficult duty. You expect from him the best that he can give in his science; and still what he gives should be appro- priate to the hour, when in pleasant personal intercourse thoughts find expression as they arise, and the stimulated imagination carries us away to more daring flights than those we venture on when our thoughts are given to serious work. Permit me, therefore, to join in the imaginative mood and to lay aside the scruples and doubts of the study and to tell you how in my dreams the stones that we are shaping with arduous labor, and that may in time form a solid structure, but none of which is finished as yet, seem to fit together; and let me sketch before your eyes the airy _ picture of a history of the American race as it appears before me in dim outlines. Man had arisen from his animal ancestors. His upright posture, his large brain, the beginnings of articulate and organized language and, the use of tools marked the contrast between him and animals. Already a _ differentiation of human types had set in. From an unknown ancestral type, that may have been related to the Australoid type, two funda- mentally distinct forms had developed—the Negroid type and the Mon- goloid type. The former spread all around the Indian Ocean; the latter found his habitat in northern and central Asia, and also reached Europe and the New World. The uniformity of these types ceased with their wide spread over the continents, and the isolation of small communities. Bushmen, Negroes and Papuans mark some divergent developments of - the one type; Americans, East Asiatics and Malays, some of the other. The development of varieties in each group showed similarities in all regions where the type occurred. ‘The races located on both sides of the Pacific Ocean exhibited the tendency to loss of pigmentation of skin, eyes and hair; to a strong development of the nose, and to a reduction of the 1 Address of the retiring President, read at the annual meeting of the Academy, 18 December, 1911. (177) 178 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES size of the face. Thus types like the Muropeans, the Ainu of Japan and some Indian tribes of the Pacific coast exhibit certain striking similari- ties in form. This tendency to parallel modification of the type indi- cates early relationship. After these conditions had developed, one of the last ice ages set in. The members of the race that lived in America were cut off from their congeners in the Old World, and during a long period of isolation an independent development of types occurred. Still the time was not long enough to wipe out the family resemblance between the Asiatics and Americans, which persists up to this day; but numerous new lines of growth developed. The face assumed a distinct form, principally through the increase of size of the nose and of the cheek-bones. The wide spread of the race over the whole territory of the two Americas that was free of ice, and the isolation and small number of individuals in each com- munity, gave rise to long-continued inbreeding, and, with it, to a sharp individualization of local types. ‘This was emphasized by the subtle influ- ences of natural and social environment. With the slow increase in numbers, these types came into contact; and through mixture and migra- tion a new distribution of typical forms developed. Thus the American race came to represent the picture of a rather irregular distribution of distinct types and colors, spread over the whole continent. The color of the skin varied from lhght to almost chocolate brown; the form of the head, from rounded to elongated; the form of the face, from very wide to rather narrow; the color of the hair, from black to dark brown and even blond, its form from straight to wavy; the lips were on the whole moderately full; the nose varied from the eagle nose of the Mississippi Indian to the concave nose of some South Americans and northwest Americans. Notwithstanding the wider distribution of these types, each area presented a fairly homogeneous picture. Gradually the great ice-cap retired. Communication between America and Asia became possible, while Europe was cut off by the wide expanse _ of the Atlantic Ocean. Man followed the ice-cap northward. Members of the American race crossed over to Asiatic soil and occupied parts of Siberia, where finally they came into contact with the Asiatic group, which had also spread northward with the retreat of the ice. Even at this early time, when the tribes were small in number and weak, human migration was only halted by impassable barriers; and thus contact of members of one group with those of another was not rare, and was always accompanied by the exchange of inventions and other cultural possessions. We must revert once more to the earlier period, when man first entered BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 179 our continent. The step from animal to man had long been made. Man brought with him a language, the use of fire, the art of making fire, the use of tools for breaking and cutting and his companionship with the dog. No other animal had yet become the associate of man. Whether he was acquainted with the bow and arrow, the lance and other more com- plex tools, is very doubtful. What the languages of the earliest Americans may have been we cannot tell. There is no reason to believe that there was only one language, for the slow infiltration of scattered communities may have brought groups possessing entirely different forms of linguistic expression into the conti- nent. Certain it is, that, when man began to increase in numbers, the number of languages spoken were legion. Complexity of form charac- terized all of them. Sprung from the same root, some became so much differentiated, that their genetic relationship can hardly be recognized. By mutual influences, the articulations of some were so changed as to agree with those of their neighbors. Forms of thought as expressed in one language influenced others, and thus heterogeneous elements were ‘ast in similar forms. As the race increased in numbers, some tribes became more powerful than others, and in intertribal wars many com- munities were exterminated. With them died their languages and some- times also their type, although it is likely that in most cases these persist in the descendants of captured women. Thus a gradual elimination of the older stocks occurred, which were replaced by newer dialects of a few groups in which, for this reason, genetic relationship can still easily be traced. Only in those regions where no tribe gained the ascendancy does the old multiplicity of stocks persist. Hence the confusion of languages in California, in many parts of Central and South America, and the comparative homogeneity on the Great Plains, on the plateau of Mexico, and in eastern South America. The diversity of sound and grammatical form which pertains to the old stocks is so great that it is hardly possible to find one feature that is common to the languages of America and that does not belong also to other continents. Certainly all the most promi- nent characteristics of many American languages are found to the same extent among the tribes of Siberia. When the contact between Asia and America was re-established, the culture of the whole continent was very simple. Some new inventions had been added to the old stock; weapons had been perfected; the begin- nings of decorative art had been laid, and the ideas of the race had ad- vanced in many directions. At this period, the Central Americans made the important step from the gathering of roots, berries and grains to the permanent cultivation of plants near their homes. The development 180 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES of the cultivated Indian-corn occurred. With it the food-supply of the people became more stable, and the population increased at a much more rapid rate than before. Other plants, like the bean, were taken into cul- tivation; and the more certain the food-supply, the more rapid became the increase in population. The process that began in the Old World with the cultivation of millet and other grains was paralleled here; and step by step the new art spread over new territories, until it had reached the area now occupied by the Argentine Republic in the south, and the Great Lakes in the north. Only the extreme south of South America and the extreme north and northwest of this continent remained outside of this zone, partly due to climatic reasons, partly due to their remote geo- graphical position. The cultivation of plants and the concurrent increase in population revolutionized the ethnological conditions of the continent; for, owing to their large numbers, the agricultural people also gained the ascendancy over others who did not conform to their habits and remained fewer in numbers. About this time, perhaps even before the perfected cultivation of plants, a marvelous industrial development set in. Basketry, pottery and weaving were some of the important industries that originated in this period. It is not likely that their origin can be traced in the same way to one restricted area, as in the case of the cultivation of Indian corn, but the many beginnings were more or less moulded in one form, and cultural stimuli probably flowed in many different directions, giving rise to technical forms that, notwithstanding their great diversity, bear the impress of one continental development. Nothing shows this process of assimilation more impressively than the decorative art of the conti- nent. Forms exuberantly developed in Mexico or western South America recur in simpler form in the United States and in the Argentine Repub- lic—not identical, to be sure, but still betraying their family resem- blance. The marginal people of the continent alone have learned nothing of these arts. Pottery reached neither the Pacific Northwest nor the extreme south of South America, and the art forms of the North Pacific coast and of the Arctic coast show no affiliation with those of the middle portions of the continent. These districts remained almost excluded from the general flow of American culture, as it developed in the agri- cultural areas of the middle parts of the two Americas. Here we may perhaps still find something similar to what existed in our continent before the period of rapid cultural advance set in. The religious life of the race grew with its other cultural achieve- ments. A strong ceremonialism pervaded the whole life and attained its BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 181 culminating point in the most complex and populous communities. The fundamental ideas were disseminated from tribe to tribe and found an echo wherever they reached. Thus from many distinct beginnings grew up a peculiar type of ritualism that preserves a similar character almost wherever it exists at all. The thinkers among all these tribes were moved by one fundamental set of ideas, and hence all developed on somewhat similar lines; but the harder the conditions of life, the less is the number of independent thinkers, and the diversity and individuality of tribal ritualism decrease, therefore, as the agricultural resources of the tribes dwindle. In the extreme Northwest and South, only weak traces of the modern middle American ceremonialism are to be found. Thus presents itself to our minds the picture of American civilization developing in the favored middle parts of the continents and spreading by a continuous flowing to and fro of ideas and inventions which stimu- lated continued growth. In contrast to these, the marginal areas of the extreme South and of the North and Northwest remained in a more stable condition. Neither history nor archeology nor ethnology allows us at present to follow this complex development in any detail. On the contrary, there seem to be yawning gaps between the various centers that sometimes seem as though they could not be bridged; and still the conviction grows stronger and stronger that this whole culture represents as much an inner unity as that of the Old World. Somewhat aside from the general current stands eastern South Amer- ica, which, although not uninfluenced by the stream of Western culture, followed in a halting way only, and in many respects went its own way. The isolation of the dense forests, the smallness of the tribes and their position aside from the great current of events that had their seat in the plateaus of the West may have contributed to this condition of affairs. Sufficient vigor, however, existed here to allow an energetic expansion northward, which built a cultural bridge between the Atlantic slopes of North and South America that brought about a certain degree of individualization of the East as compared to the West. I will not follow the higher civilizations that were built up on the basis of the Western culture in Mexico, Yucatan and on the western plateaus of South America. When these civilizations arose, their founda- tions were probably those that I described before as pertaining to a large portion of middle America, extending from some parts of the United States well south into South America. On this basis, however, they built up a promising structure: they laid the foundation of the sciences, devel- oped the art of writing, learned how to work precious metals and copper 182 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and advanced in the arts of architecture and engineering. When the advent of the Spaniards cut short this growth, it had attained a stage that might easily have led to accelerated advances. We must now turn to the northern marginal area, which did not take part to any considerable extent in the cultural work of the people of middle America. Notwithstanding this, the area was not isolated but received stimuli from another direction. The Old World lies near at hand, and from here flowed the sources of new cultural achievements. As in the New World, the early growth of culture in Central America had stimulated the neighboring tribes, and as inventions and ideas had been carried to and fro, so it happened in the Old World. A constant exchange of cultural achievements may be observed from the coasts of the Mediterranean Sea to China and Japan. What wonder, then, if the waves of this movement struck the shores of our world where it is nearest Asia, not with a strong impact but as the last ripples of the spreading circle. The Siberians and Americans were closely affiliated before the introduction of domesticated animals gave a new character to Siberian life; and at this time the Asiatic house, bow, armor and Asiatic tales found their way to America and spread over the whole northwestern portion of the North American continent, reaching even the tribes of our Western prairies. The Southern marginal area, the extreme south of South America and parts of Brazil present a different set of conditions—an_ isolation that is probably equalled in no other part of the world excepting, per- haps, Tasmania. Unfortunately, our knowledge of these regions is so imperfect that almost nothing can be said in regard to the type of cul- ture of the tribes inhabiting this area. May I point out that here lies the most important problem for the investigation of the earliest ethnic history of the American Continent, because here alone may we hope to recover remains of the earliest types of American mental development ? The investigation of this problem, of the ethnology of the Fuegians and Ghes tribes according to modern thorough methods, may therefore ur- gently be recommended to the Carnegie Institution, that furthers so many lines of research, or to other institutions that are devoted to the advancement of knowledge. Here halts my fancy, which has taken me in rapid flight over thou- sands of years, over endless changes of types and peoples. I do not ven- ture to speculate about the question of a cultural relation between the islands of Polynesia and South America; for the suggestions are too slight, and the improbability of relations seems at present too great. BOAS, THE HISTORY OF THE AMERICAN RACE 183 We may, however, cast a glance at the forms that America presents when compared to the Old World If our picture contains any truth, the independence of American achievements from Old World achievements stands out prominently. The industrial arts were discovered in two large areas independently—the Afro-Asiatic and the American. ‘They spread over continents but remained separated until the period of European colonization. To a great extent, the discoveries made were analogous— basketry, weaving, pottery, work in metals, agriculture. ‘The important step that the Asiatic or European hunter made to the domestication of animals had hardly begun in America, where the Peruvians had developed. the use of the llama. Much less had the still more far-reaching discovery. been made of agriculture with the help of animals and the invention of the wheel. The use of smelted iron for tools was not known. Important differences may also be traced in fundamental forms of social institu- tions, arts and religious beliefs. Thus some of the most important advances of the races of the Old World were not known in America, although in other respects the work of civilization had far advanced. In concluding, I beg to remind you once more that the sketch that I have given, although based on the accumulation of observed data, must not be taken as more than a lightly woven fabric of hypothesis. At every step, there are lacunz of our knowledge which our imagination may tem- porarily bridge to serve as a guide for further inquiries but which have to be filled by solid, careful work to reach results that will be acceptable before the forum of science. _ Or ; au) Tig: Py ¢ i” d Pi ae " ¥ \ te» ¥ 7 rat} a mae sty a ro i : 3 ei | ee Nia Mp rei ay pat) | ay Ted oe ie vuRA en A co SS UA eae ha ck ae le. Eat! SP nT pa Ant eae % rf 1: ; : piae hh’ Poe ae ae ¥ j y opyh (Re) anal is ‘ 1 5 ‘ \ a & A = if : fd oy ’ * ia j BPs i OM cy - Li r ‘4 } " j he gee SY Ads Sy ; ee PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES _ (Lyceum or Naturat History, 1817-1876) The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz. : (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec- ords of meetings and similar matter. A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of the separate articles depends upon their length and the number of illus- trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the Academy. The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing above the title of each paper. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs, etc. The price is one dollar per part as issued. All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to THE LIBRARIAN, New York Academy of Sciences, care of American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. ANNALS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES | Vol. XXI, pp. 185-263 Editor, Epmunp OT1s Hovry RECORDS OF MEETINGS CHARTER, CONSTITUTION AND MEMBER- SHIP IN 1911 OF THE - NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES WITH INDEX TO VOLUME XxI NEW YORK PUBLISHED BY THE ACADEMY 25 Marca, 1912 .THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyozum oF N ATURAL HIsTorY, 1817-1876) OFFIcERs, 1911 President—Franz Boas, Columbia University Vice-Presidents—GuorcE F. Kunz, Freperic A. Lucas, R. S. WoopwortH, WILLIAM CAMPBELL Recording Secretary—EpMuND Otis Hovey, American Museum Corresponding Secretary—Henry HE. Crampron, American Museum Treasurer—EMERSON McMIttiin, 40 Wall Street Inbrarian—RatpeH W. Tower, American Museum SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY Chairman—GerorGcE F. Kuwz, 401 Fifth Avenue Secretary—Cuak.LEs P. BeRKEY, Columbia University SECTION OF BIOLOGY Chairman—FRrevEric A. Lucas, American Museum. Secretary—L. Hussakor, American Museum SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY Chairman—WILLIAM CAMPBELL, Columbia University Secretary—Epwarp J. THATCHER, Pesolin College SECTION, OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY Chairman—R. 8S. WoopwortH, Columbia University Secretary—FREDERIC LyMAN WELLS, Columbia University The sessions of the Academy are held on Monday evenings at 8:15 o’clock from October to May, inclusive, at the American Museum of Natural History, 77th Street and Central Park, West. Lv tee wULd [Annats New YorK ACADEMY OF ScIENCES, Vol. XXI, pp. 185-252. 25 March, 1912.] LIRR A NEW YORK BOTANICAL GARDEN. RECORD OF MEETINGS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. January, 1911, to December, 1911. By Epmunp Oris Hovey, Recording Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. 9 JANUARY, 1911. The Academy met at 8:15 Pp. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidates for active membership in the Academy, recommended by Council, were duly elected: John P. Haines, 20 Fifth Avenue, Daniel O. Fearing, Newport, R. I., A. O. Garrett, 615 South 9th St., Long Island City, C. W. Parsons, 30 West 95th Street. The Recording Secretary announced that Dr. C. B. Davenport had de- clined to accept the election to Vice-President for 1911, and Dr. F. A. Lucas had been elected Vice-President of the Academy and Chairman of the Section of Biology to take his place. He reported further that Dr. Clark Wissler had been elected Councilor for one year in place of Dr. Franz Boas and that Professor C. C. Trowbridge had been elected Coun- cilor for three years in place of Dr. Simon Flexner. The Academy then adjourned. EpMuND Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary. (185) 186 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 9 JANUARY, 1911. Section was called to order at 8:25 p. mM., Vice-President George F. Kunz presiding. About 150 members and visitors were present. The reading of the minutes was dispensed with, and there being no special business requiring immediate attention, the meeting was at once turned over to the following lecturer: Frank D. Adams, Resutts oF EXPERIMENTS ON THE BEHAVIOR OF RocKS UNDER PRESSURE. The Chairman introduced Professor Adams, Dean of Appled Science and Professor of Geology in McGill University and a corresponding member of the Academy, who gave a brief résumé of earlier work and explained the objects sought and difficulties encountered and a most interesting and instructive account of the methods and results of his own experiments. At the close of the lecture, Mr. Chambers asked whether any experiments had been made in the presence of water. Professor Adams replied that only one sample had been tested in this manner. The Academy tendered a vote of thanks to Professor Adams for his lecture. The meeting then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 16 JANUARY, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: C. Stuart Gager, Crypromeric INHERITANCE IN ONAGRA. Roy C. Andrews, Firtp Notrs oN JAPANESE WHALES. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Gager made reference to an abnormal plant of Onagra biennis that appeared in a pedigreed culture following exposure to radium rays of the ovule employed in producing the plant. The plant possessed two primary shoot-systems (rosettes and subsequent cauline stems) of equiva- lent value but manifesting entirely unlike morphological characters. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 187 Photographs were shown, and various possibilities were suggested as to the cause or causes of the anomaly. That the effect was due to the ex- posure to radium rays was held to be possible, though not conclusively shown. The antecedent history of the plant and the fact that hybrids between the two unlike halves manifested, in the F, and F, generations, the characters of only one of the parent shoots, was interpreted to empha- size the fact, already recognized, that the inheritance of a character and its expression are two quite different phenomena. Mr. Andrews gave an account of a recent seven-months’ stay at the Japanese whaling stations, telling of the methods employed in capturing and preparing the whales for commercial use; also of new notes on the habits of finback, blue and sei whales. The latter species, called by the Japanese “sardine whale,” is referable to Balenoptera arctica Schlegel, and although it has been taken for a number of years at the Japanese stations, almost no material relating to it is extant. The species is so closely allied to Balenoptera borealis Lesson of the Atlantic that further investigation will probably prove it synonymous. Photographs of the rare North Pacific blackfish (Globicephalus scammont) and of several species of dolphins were also shown. It was announced that a new por- poise of a most peculiar body shape had been secured and would be de- scribed in a future number of the American Museum Bulletin. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. The Section then adjourned. L. HussaKkor, Secretary. SECTION-OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 23 JANUARY, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Clifford B. Harmon, ExprertMents IN AVIATION. Hudson Maxim, PRACTICAL UTILITY OF FLYING MACHINES. Philip Wilcox, THE ABROPLANE. James H. Hare, TAKING THE First PHOTOGRAPHS OF THE FLIGHTS OF THE WricHt BrotHers at Kitty HAwkK, NortTH CAROLINA. 188 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SUMMARY OF PAPERS. The various papers were well illustrated with lantern slides and by models loaned by the United States Aéronautical Reserve. The Section then adjourned. EDWARD J. THATCHER, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 30 JANUARY, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Grant Wilson presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Pliny E. Goddard, THe DisrrRisuTioN AND RELATIONSHIP OF THE APACHE. SUMMARY OF PAPER. Dr. Goddard emphasized the fact that the Apache are divided into a oumber of distinct political and dialectic groups; while culturally, there is a gradual transition as an observer proceeds from east to west from the life of the buffalo-hunting Plains type into that of the Southwestern culture as represented by the Pima. The Section then adjourned. F. LyMAN WELLS, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. 6 Frpruary, 1911. The Academy met at 8:20 Pp. mM. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidates for membership in the Academy, recom- mended by Council, were duly elected: ACTIVE MEMBERSHIP. Herbert Lang, American Museum of Natural History. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 189 ASSOCIATE MEMBERSHIP. C. T. Kirk, Normal College, Miss Evangeline Moon, Normal College. The Recording Secretary then reported the following deaths: Sir Francis Galton, an Honorary Member for 1 year, Hon. J. Hampden Robb, an Active Member for 13 years, J. J. Higginson, an Honorary Member for 5 years. The Academy then adjourned. EpmMtnpb Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 6 Fresruary, 1911. Section was called to order at 8:25 Pp. mM., Vice-President Kunz pre- siding. About 60 members and others were in attendance. The minutes of the previous meeting were read and approved. A communication was presented from Prof. D. S. Martin on the nam- ing of two mineral varieties. The first is a variety of muscovite, for which the name Schernikite is proposed. The other is a variety of meso- lite, for which the name Winchellite is suggested. The following titles were presented : A. A. Julien, THe Evipencr FROM THE PALISADES ON THE GENESIS OF ANTIGORITE (By title). G.S. Rogers, GroL.ocy oF THE CORTLANDT SERIES AND ITS EMERY DeE- posits (By title). SUMMARY OF PAPER. Dr. Martin, in his paper, said: At the meeting of the New York Mine- ralogical Club, held at the American Museum of Natural History on December 14th, 1910, I exhibited certain minerals and proposed therefor two varietal names as follows: (1) The fibro-prismatic pink variety of muscovite, identified as such in composition by Bowman in the Mineralogical Magazine in 1902 but so remarkably different in its physical characters and entire “habit” that it is certainly deserving of a varietal name. The mineral occurs freely and almost exclusively at Haddam Rock, Conn., intergrown with ordinary muscovite and lepidolite, in the albitic dyke. As the specimens described and identified by Bowman formed a part of a series of Haddam Rock minerals presented to Oxford University by a member and ex-president 190 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES of the Mineralogical Club, Mr. Ernest Schernikow, of this city, | propose for this marked and peculiar variety the name of Schernikite. (2) The nodular variety of mesolite, generally called Thomsonite, from Grand Marais, Lake Superior. Professor N. H. Winchell, in several articles, has shown this mineral to be not Thomsonite at all but a true mesolite in composition and has urged the use of the latter correct name instead of the former incorrect one. As it is, however, a distinct variety peculiar to that locality and considerably used as a “local” gem-stone, it is entitled to a name as much as lintonite or chlorastrolite, and in recognition of its identifier, I suggest that of Winchellite. The evening was then given to the following lecture: Frank A. Perrett, K. J. C., Tire 1909 Eruprion av TENERIFE AND TILE GREAT HRUPTION OF ETNA IN MARCH AND APRIL, 1910. Mr. Perrett has been for several years a close student of volcanic phe- nomena. Many excellent lantern illustrations were shown representing recent activities and conditions investigated by Mr. Perrett. The lecture was listened to with great interest, and remarks were made by several members of the Academy. : The meeting then adjourned. CHARLES P. BrerKEy, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 13 Fespruary, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: W.D. Matthew, Ciimare snp Evonurtion. W.K. Gregory, ON tHe Limes or Hryops AND THE ORIGIN OF LimBs FROM PAIRED FINS. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Matthew said in abstract: The thesis of the paper is as follows: 1. Secular climatic change has been an important factor in the evolu- tion of land vertebrates and the principal known cause of their present ’ distribution. 2. The principal lines of migration in later geological epochs have been radial from holarctic centers of dispersal. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 191 3. The geographic changes required to explain the past and present distribution of land vertebrates are not extensive and do not affect the permanence of the ocean basins as defined by the continental shelf. 4, The theory of alternations of moist and uniform with arid and zonal climates associated, respectively, with partial submergence and ex- treme emergence of the continental areas, as elaborated by Chamberlin, are in exact accord with the apparent course of evolution of land verte- brates, when interpreted with due allowance for the probable gaps in the geologic record. 5. The numerous hypothetic land bridges in temperate, tropical and southern regions, connecting continents now separated by deep oceans, which have been advocated by various authors, are improbable, incon- sistent and unnecessary to explain geographic distribution. On the. con- trary, the known facts point distinctly to the permanency of the deep- ocean basins during the later epochs of geologic time, to the alternate connection and separation of the land areas within the line of the conti- nental shelf and to the continued isolation of those land areas which are surrounded by deep ocean. These theories are substantially an adaptation of the conservative views of Wallace and other zodlogists to the geological theories of Cham- berlin. They are defended by a consideration (1) of the nature and extent of the defects in the geological record; (2) of the relations of the zoological regions to each other and the changes effected by elevation or submergence of 100 fathoms; (3) of the principles of dispersal of land animals; (4) of the character of the fauna of oceanic islands (including Madagascar, Cuba and New Zealand) and the degree of probability which attaches to accidental transportation as a means of populating them; (5) of the present and known past distribution of the mammalia, group by group, in considerable detail; (6) of the distribution of the different orders of reptilia in a less detailed manner; (7) of the distribution of birds and fishes, with a few instances from invertebrate distribution which have been especially urged in support of hypothetical bridges; (8) of the objections to such bridges and an interpretation of the real significance of such evidence as has been adduced in support of them. I believe that the supposed cumulative evidence obtained in various groups of animals or plants for various continental bridges is due simply to identical errors in interpretation running through all such instances. On the other hand, to admit such bridges would seem to involve certain distribution results, which, in the groups which I have studied, assuredly do not exist. 192 ANNALS NEW.YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Dr. Gregory said in abstract: In a skeleton of the temnospondylous amphibian, Hryops megacephaius Cope, from the Permian of Texas, which is now being mounted in the American Museum, the limbs are of special interest. Many resemblances to the contemporary reptile Dia- dectes are seen: in the stout, long coraco-scapula, the short, wide-headed humerus, with its very wide, prominent and backwardly directed ento- condyle, in the short fore-arm, in the very heavy, solid pelvis, stout femur and fully ossified carpus and tarsus. In the character of its limbs, Eryops was on the whole nearer to Sphenodon than to the Urodeles, though far more archaic than the former. As shown by the facets, the humerus and femur were held almost at right angles to the body, the opposite feet being held very widely apart. | The generalized character of the limbs of Hryops with respect to those of higher Tetrapoda invite renewed inquiry into the origin of paired limbs from fins. The limbs of known branchiosaurs and microsaurs do not carry us very far back toward any known type of fish fin. In these orders, the cylindrical shafts of the long bones, with cartilaginous ends, the cartilaginous carpus and tarsus, the weak shoulder girdle and pelvis suggest a secondary adaptation to aquatic habits. From the work of Thacher, Goodrich, Dean, R. C. Osburn and others, it seems probable that the paired fins of fishes, like the median fins, have evolved from wide-based fins with serially arranged basal and radial cartilages. After the formation of the primary shoulder girdle and pelvis and of the pro-, meso- and metapterygia by fusion and growth of the basals, the various types of paired fins seen in plagiostomes, chime- roids, pleuracanths, dipnoans, crossopterygians and actinopterygians seem to have arisen in each case through the protrusion of the basal cartilages, differential growth and shifting of the radials, and in some cases (e. @.. pleuracanths, crossopterygians, dipnoans) also through the extension of the radials around to the post-axial side of the metapterygial axis. If the Amphibia have descended from forerunners of teleostomous and dip- noan fishes (as seemed likely), then it was entirely probable that their paired fins had been transformed into limbs through the extreme pro- trusion of the proximal cartilages, differential growth and regrouping of the more distal cartilages, reduction of the dermal rays. This struc- tural change may well have been in large part effected before the air- breathing proto-amphibians had left the water, owing to the assumption of a new function in the paired fins, 7. ¢., pushing against solid objects such as roots in the stagnant water, instead of merely steering. A study of the pectoral girdle and fins of Sauripteris, a rhizodont crossopterygian of the Upper Devonian, in comparison with those of Polypterus and with RECORDS OF MEETINGS 193 the limbs of primitive amphibians, had suggested the following provis- ional homologies : Crossopterygian Tetrapod “Tnfraclavicle” = Clavicle “Clavicle” (of Parker) = Scapula “Supraclavicle” = Cleithrum “Coracoid” (hypocoracoid) == Coracoid (or precoracoid 7) “Scapula” (hypercoracoid) == Humerus Proximal basals —= Radius and ulna Distal basals = Carpals Radials —= Metacarpals and phalanges Dermal rays (derived from = Nails, scales scales) The reduction and loss of the post-temporal may have accompanied the freeing of the shoulder girdle from the skull. These views differ radically from those of Owen, Parker and Gegenbaur. The paired fins of Sauripteris were the only ones known that seemed to foreshadow even in a remote degree the paired limbs of the Tetrapoda. In the pelvic fin of Husthenopteron, another crossopterygian of the Upper Devonian, dif- ferential evolution of the basals and radials had brought about certain remote resemblances to the tetrapod limb. The ilium of tetrapods ap- peared to be a neomorph. The Section then adjourned. L. HussaKkor, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 20 FeBruary, 1911. By permission of Council, no meeting was held. EDWARD J. THATCHER, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 2% Frepruary, 1911. Section met in conjunction with the American Ethnological Associa- tion at 8:15 Pp. M., Gen. Joseph Grant Wilson presiding. 194 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Robert H. Lowie, WomeEN’s SocieTIES OF THE MIssoURI VILLAGE TRIBES. ’ SUMMARY OF PAPER. Dr. Lowie said in abstract: Like the men’s military organizations, the women’s societies of the Hidatsa and Mandan were arranged in a series of age-grades, membership in each of which was acquired by collective purchase. The element of purchase was the determining factor, inas- much as a woman retained her membership, regardless of age, as long as it was not purchased of her by some other individual. In several of the women’s organizations, there was a clearly marked magico-religious element, which seems to have been lacking in the men’s age-grades. Thus, the Goose society was associated with the planting of corn, and the Buffalo women’s society was believed to control the coming of a buffalo herd. The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLS, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. 6 Marcu, 1911. The Academy met at 8:17 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidates for active membership in the Academy, recommended by Council, were duly elected: Edwin C. Jameson, 35 West 49th Street, Frederick G. Agens, Newark, N. J. The Academy then adjourned. EpMuND Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 6 Marcu, 1911. The Section met at 8:22 p. m., Vice-President George F. Kunz pre- siding. Seventeen members and visitors were present. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read, corrected and approved. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 195 The following programme was then offered: G. Sherburne Rogers, GroLogy or THE CoRTLANDT SERIES AND ITS Emery Deposits. A. W. Grabau, Nortu AMERICAN TPES OF LOWER PALEOZOIC SEDIMENTATION IN NORTHERN SCOTLAND. A. A. Julien, THE EVIDENCES FROM THE PALISADES ON THE GENESIS OF ANTIGORITE. (Read by title.) SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Mr. Rogers illustrated his talk on the distribution and structure of the Cortlandt Series with many lantern slides. Remarks were made by Professor J. F. Kemp. Dr. Grabau emphasized the similarity of development in correspond- ing sections of Europe and America and made some general suggestions as to former land connections. The Section then adjourned, CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 13 Marcu, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The meeting was devoted to the following public lecture: George A. Soper, Screntiric Aspects oF THE WorK OF THE Merno- POLITAN SEWERAGE COMMISSION. Dr. Soper, President of the Metropolitan Sewerage Commission, has done a great amount of scientific work in connection with the investiga- tions of the commission upon the pollution of the waters of New York harbor from various sources. The most interesting features of this work and its results were dwelt upon in popular manner by the lecturer. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor, Secretary. 196 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 20 Marcu, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The programme for the evening consisted of the following lecture: G. W. Ritchey, Recent CELESTIAL PHOTOGRAPHS WITH THE 60-INCH REFLECTOR OF THE Mr. WILSON OBSERVATORY. SUMMARY OF PAPER. Professor Ritchey first of all spoke of the large telescopes of the world and showed various illustrations of them and photographs obtained. Then he described the 60-inch reflector, the method of manufacture and the building of the observatory at Mt. Wilson and showed his wonderful pho- tographs obtained there. The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 27 Marcu, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Grant Wilson presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Paul R. Radosavijevich, CrerHatic INpicEs IN RELATION To Sex, AGE AND SOCIAL CONDITIONS. Franz Boas, NOTES ON THE INDIAN TRIBES OF MEXICO. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Radosavljevich illustrated his lecture by charts. A discussion, in which Dr. Fishberg and Professor Boas took part, developed with refer- ence to the possibility of accuracy in certain measurements taken on living individuals. Dr. Radosavljevich apologized to Professor Boas for having unconsciously misrepresented his theories regarding the cephalic index. Professor Boas’s talk was based on his recent investigations during a several months’ sojourn in Mexico. The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLs, Secretary. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 197 BUSINESS MEETING. 3 APRIG 1911, The Academy met at 8:18 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. In the absence of the Recording Secretary, Dr. Charles P. Berkey was elected Recording Secretary pro tem. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidate for active membership in the Academy, recommended by Council, was duly elected: Professor Charles R. Eastman, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. The Academy then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Recording Secretary pro tem. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. SVAPRIE, Ott. Section was called to order by Vice-President G. F. Kunz at 8:23 Pp. M. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was offered: D. D. Condit, OBSERVATIONS ON VOLCANOES OF GUATEMALA. George F. Kunz, Tur FINDING OF A GREAT Beryt aT MARAMBAYA. A.W.Grabau, CLASSIFICATION OF SEAS AND LAKE BasINS. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Mr. Condit gave an account of explorations made by an expedition of which he was a member in 1907 and described the principal volcanic features of the region with the aid of lantern views. Dr. Kunz showed a full-size drawing of the beryl and described its character and quality, as follows: Fine minerals have come to us during the past century or more from the pegmatite rocks of Minas Geraes, Brazil, notably tourmaline, green, blue, or partly colored, chrysoberyl, topaz and other minerals, many of which have more or less gem value when in perfect condition. ‘These have been a continual surprise to the mineralogists and gem collectors of the world. It is my purpose here to note the occurrence of one of the most remarkable finds that has ever been found in this region. 198 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES On the 28th of March, 1910, in a pegmatite vein at Marambaya, a village in the vicinity of Arassuahy, on the Jequititonha River, in the State of Minas Geraes, Brazil, there was found a crystal of beryl, the greatest crystal of precious beryl (aquamarine) ever found. In form, it was a simple hexagonal pyramid with slight irregularities due to com- pression, and it terminated with a simple basal plane at both ends. The crystal weighed 110.5 kilograms, was 48.5 centimeters high and from 40 to 42 centimeters in its different widths. It was so transparent that, looking down into the crystal through its basal termination, it could be seen through from end to end. In color, it was greenish-blue, absolutely free from included impurities, but it was traversed hy a number of fractures. This crystal was found by a Turk, who mined it in what is known as a primitive mine, at a depth of from five to six meters, and only with the greatest difficulty was it transported on a canoe to the coast, by way of the Jequititonha River and then shipped to Bahia, where it is said that he realized $25,000 for it. It is estimated that this crystal would furnish at least 200,000 carats of aquamarines of various sizes, although the entire quantity is not likely to glut the market as it does not represent over 5 per cent. of the annual yield. It is not of the deepest blue nor of the deepest green, yet it is an excellent sea color; the quality is ex- cellent, and more material will be furnished than from any single crystal of any gem that we have any record of. When values become so great and buyers so few, commercialism usually asserts itself. In this instance, it is believed that a net profit of $100,000 will be realized. Professor Grabau gave an elaborate classification of lake basins with the aid of a chart prepared for this purpose. The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 10 Aprit, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. The following programme was then offered : Roy C. Andrews, A New AND PECULIAR PORPOISE FROM JAPAN. J. T. Nichols, OBSERVATIONS ON Brrps AND FIsHES MADE ON AN EXPEDITION TO FLORIDA WATERS. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 199 SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Mr. Andrews exhibited photographs and parts of the skeleton of a new porpoise secured in the summer of 1910, in Rikuzen province, Japan. This specimen is allied to Phocena dalli True and with that species forms a distinct group of Phocena-like porpoises which deserves generic rank. This group resembles Phocena externally but has white side and ventral areas sharply defined from the black of the upper parts, a falcate dorsal fin and vertebre numbering 95 or more. The type of the new genus to which Phocena dalli was referred is the specimen which was secured in Japan and has been formally described in a Bulletin of the American Museum of Natural History, now in press. ‘The Japanese porpoise presents characters, both externally and in the skeleton, which distinguish it from all other members of the entire family. The caudal peduncle shows a strongly marked “hump,” and ventrally a prominent concavity which gives the posterior portion of the body a most extra- ordinary appearance. The neural spines of the entire vertebral series are extremely long and slender, reaching a height much greater than in any other known member of the Delphinide. The transverse processes are also very long and rod-like. The number of vertebre is 95, approaching closely P. dalli, which has 97. The scapula is unlike that of any other member of the family in that its height almost equals its greatest breadth, and it is in general shape somewhat like that of a Baleen whale. The specimen is, on the whole, one of the most remarkable members of the Delphinide that have thus far been discovered. Mr. Nichols gave an account of a trip through Florida waters on Mr. Alessandro Fabbri’s yacht 7'ek/a in the interests of the American Mu- seum’s department of fishes. Attention was called to the abundance of the white ibis and Louisiana heron, contrasted with the scarcity of aigrette-bearing herons. After a brief mention of the work and the results obtained, the balance of fish-life in a fresh-water outlet of the everglades was compared with the balance of fish-life in the salt water as at Key West. In the former situations, gar pikes (Lepisosteus) were abundant, as were various Centrarchids (among them the large-mouthed bass and blue-gill sunfish) which darted in and out through the little channels among the weed but which did not drive head first through the masses of weed as did the leathery-skinned gars, and only made quick sallies into the shallower and less open waters, where various species of Peeciliids, especially Gambusia, and Fundulus goodei were tremendously abundant. ‘lhe surprising freedom from mosquitoes was mentioned, 200 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES and it was pointed out how the existing balance of fish-life was favorable to a great abundance of Gambusia, ete., which might be expected to prey on mosquito larve. The Centrarchids would be likely to hold in check a fish like the banded pickerel, which would have followed these small fishes into the shallows where the Centrarchids did not follow them and perhaps materially reduce their numbers. The situation here, where the large primitive gar, the spiny-rayed modern Centrarchids and the abundant intermediate Peeciliids made up the bulk of the fish population, was compared with the more complicated marine situation where large selachians and spiny-rayed basses, snappers, grunts, wrasses, scorpion fishes, etc., and schooling herrings and anchovies of various sorts in a way constituted homologous classes. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 17 Apri, 1911. By permission of Council, no meeting was held. EpWwarpD J. THATCHER, . Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 24 ApRIL, 1911. Section met at 8:15 P. M., in conjunction with the New York Branch of the American Psychological Association. The afternoon session was held at the Psychological Laboratory, Columbia University, and the evening session was held at the American Museum of Natural History. The following programme was offered: George R. Montgomery, A SimpLe Meruop ror THE Stupy oF EN- TOPTIC PHENOMENA. J.E. Wallace Wallin, Tur PrRererreD LENGTH oF INTERVAL. E. K. Strong, Jr., SEx AND CLASS DIFFERENCES IN RESPONSE TO ADVERTISEMENTS. E. L. Thorndike, THE CURVE OF WORK. H. L. Hollingworth, THE INFLUENCE OF CAFFEIN ON THE QUALITY OF SLEEP. W. P. Montague, Has Psycuotoey Lost Its Mrnp? I. Woodbridge Riley, THr SpreaD oF CHRISTIAN SCIENCE. E. W. Scripture, PSYCHANALYSIS AND THE INTERPRETATION OF DREAMS, RECORDS OF MEETINGS 201 SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Mr. Montgomery said in abstract: By using small silver beads strung on a wire in a spectacle frame to reflect light into the eye, we have a simple method which has many advantages in the study of entoptic phenomena. From the standpoint of psychology, perhaps the most im- portant use of such an instrument is in the study of iris movements. For some experiments, it is well to cover the frame with a black cloth, allowing the light to reach the beads through a slit. If three beads are used, they may be moved back and forth and the intensity of the light increased or diminished until the middle circle of light thrown upon the retina is exactly tangent to the other two. Such a contrivance allows a view of both pupils at the same time. It also allows careful measure- ment of dilation and contraction and furthermore permits the eye and the body to take an easy, normal position. The use of a single bead with two or three sources of light enables one to diversify the intensity of the circles of light thrown upon different parts of the retina. This is important in determining the parallax of objects in the eye which throw the shadows. Combinations are possible with this arrangement and other experiments, Purkinje’s for instance, and the beads may also be used for throwing circles of lights from colored globes upon the retina. These circles may be superposed, the different parts of the retina compared as to color sensation, the effect of contrast brought out, etc. Mr. Wallin detailed the experimental results of two simple methods of investigating the preferred length of auditory intervals; a method of impression, in which a preference was reached by successive comparisons of pairs of metronome clicks in a definite order; and a method of ex- pression, in which the preference for musical tempos was determined by measuring the durations between the responses (stamps of the foot) made to musical selections by the gallery patrons in theaters. The re- sults showed, among other things, that the average interval preference with metronome clicks corresponded precisely with the average tempo of the most vigorous responses to musical rhythms (0.51 sec.) ; that the very general tendency to rhythmize recurrent auditory impressions of the same intensity (metronome clicks) often rested on an ascertainable qualitative basis; that the tendency to perceive different lengths of auditory intervals as indifferent or neutral is infrequent; that instead of selecting a definite, invariable central tendency in respect to interval preferences, the subjects can be arranged most naturally into a number of types (slow, medium, fast, rapid) ; that the absence of a clear, definite central tendency is due to the fact that the preferences are determined 202 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES by varying factors permanently or temporarily operative (physical pain, mental disquietude, repose, strain of suspense or expectation, stimulation to movement, rhythmical tendency, associations, suggestions, preference for melody, harmony, or rhythm in music, but not musical capacity, etc.) ; that we can lay down limits within which the preferences for intervals and musical tempos will most probably come (0.40 to 0.70 sec.) ; and that the vigor of the responses in music varies according as the time is two-four or three-four, and according to the relative influence of other factors than that of speed (catchiness or familiarity of the music, incisiveness of the accent, etc.). Dr. Strong said in abstract: In an extensive study of the relative values of the motives, which are used in advertisements, that lead one to buy toilet soap, a number of interesting facts as to class and sex dif- ferences were noted. It was found that the order of preference for such motives as were obtained from fifty college students correlated very high with similar orders from educated men and from educated women. In fact, there were no specific differences between such orders. But an order of preference from a group of one hundred men living in and about Garrison, N. Y., showed a negative correlation. The striking point about this latter order, however, was not so much that uneducated persons do not agree with educated ones with respect to which are the strong motives, but that they do not agree amongst themselves at all— their order being little more than a chance order. This is the more striking when we realize that two groups of educated women correlated as high as + .93. In this study, it was very clear that women are less variable in their judgments as to the merit of these motives or appeals than are men. Not only were the corresponding probable errors of the medians smaller in almost every case among the women, but the various sub-groups of women correlated higher with respect to each other than did the sub-groups of men. Such motives as “beauty” and “for the baby” ranked higher among the women than among the men, but the surprising thing here was that the two sexes agreed so closely with respect to the other motives. Professor Thorndike reported results of five subjects, each working eight hours (two hours on each of four days) at adding printed examples, each of ten one-place numbers. It was found that initial spurt did not appear at all as a general tendency in all students, or consistently in the work of any one of them. There was a slight tendency to spurt in the last five minutes, but this was very slight and by no means consistent throughout the group, or important in the case of any member of the group. Warming up was found to play a slight and possibly inap- RECORDS OF MEETINGS 203 preciable part in the curve of work. The influence of practise and that of fatigue approximately balanced, so that the general tendency of the character of the work is not only toward rectilinearity, but also toward parallelism with the base line. Dr. Hollingworth said in abstract: Sixteen subjects were given doses of caffein alkaloid (1-6 grains), at varying times of day, for a period of a month. Incidentally to a series of mental tests which were con- tinued throughout this period, each subject recorded the approximate number of hours’ sleep after each day and graded the quality of the night’s rest as “better than usual,” “ordinary,” or “worse than usual.” Adequate control methods were used. Clear individual differences were shown in the effect of the drug on the quality of sleep—and these dif- ferences were independent of age, sex and size differences. On the basis of the squad averages, doses of 1-4 grains do not impair sleep. Doses larger than these produce sleeplessness. ‘This effect is greatest when the dose is taken day after day, allowing a cumulative effect. When a single dose is taken on alternate days, the effect is greatest when the caffein is taken between meals. ‘’aken with meals, its action is weakened and retarded. Only in exceptional cases does sleeplessness follow the 1-4 grain dose, and in many cases a 6-grain dose is without effect. The “approximate number of hours” of sleep does not seem to be modified by the action of the drug, probably because this matter is controlled by a more or less artificial schedule. Dr. Montague said in abstract: The movement to dispense with the concept of mind or consciousness and to substitute the concept of be- havior as the sufficient object of psychological study was criticized (1) on the ground of ambiguity and (2) on the ground of inadequacy. 1. Behavior, as the movement of an organism in response to stimulus, is ambiguous in that it may mean (a) the intra-neural current from sensory center to muscle, or (b) the extra-neural motion of the organism or its members. Behavior in the first sense might conceivably be the basis of and hence a substitute for consciousness, but it would be visible to the external observer and therefore relatively useless as an object of psychological study. Behavior in the second sense is visible to the observer, and so a useful index of consciousness; but being extra-neural, it could not possibly be the correlate or basis of the organism’s own ex- perience. The motor theory of consciousness derives much of its plausi- bility from an unconscious shifting from one of these meanings of be- havior to another. 2. But behavior in either or both of these senses is inadequate as a substitute for or even as a correlate of consciousness, (@) because, unless 204 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES evidence is given for an innervation sense, it can only be the kinesthetic sensations that result from one’s movement, and never the movement itself, that one experiences; hence, to reduce consciousness to movement would be to reduce all sensations to kinesthetic sensations; (b) because the field of consciousness is infinitely too rich a manifold to be put in one to one correspondence with any system of mere motions, internal or external. Mr. Riley said in abstract: From recent investigations made by Pro- fessor Joseph Jastrow comparing the results of the Federal Census of 1910 with the number of advertised Christian Science practitioners, there is shown a three-fold distribution of the sect, chiefly in three pairs of states: Massachusetts and New York, Illinois and Missouri, Colorado and California. Here the pathological factor is first in evidence, for the centers of influence are large cities, with their concomitant nervous dis- orders, and the health resorts of the mountains and coast. A second factor is that of free thought, or a liberal attitude toward the uncon- ventional such as is found in the given states, with their large cities and their great number of imported foreign faiths. A third factor is financial, a reaction from overmuch material prosperity and a leaning towards a somewhat ascetic immaterialism. This leads to the final factor, the previous idealisms which prepared the soil, such as New England transcendentalism, with the Emersonian call to the “demon- stration” of the “spiritual principle,” and the German idealism repre- sented in the St. Louis School. These four factors apply not only to the followers of Christian Science, Dut to the founder; and here Eddyism may be considered not only an afterclap of transcendentalism, but a recrudescence of Neoplatonism. As in Rome and Alexandria, so in America, there has arisen a demand for knowledge dependent on “divine” communications; a denial of sensible existence; a contempt for reason and physical science, and a destruction of the distinction between sensible and intelligible. In all this, Christian Science shows itself a recurrent phase of the larger movement of so-called New Thought, with its oc- cultism, gnosticism and mysticism. The type of mind to which the movement appeals is complex—practical and yet uncritical, non-academic and yet speculative. Such a mind fails to distinguish the fundamental fallacy of Christian Science—that while it disclaims materialism, it still reeks with material terms such as “mental offshoots,” “gravitation Godward,” and the “aroma of Spirit.” In fine, the “divine metaphysics” bolsters itself up with the latest physical discoveries, such as Hertzian waves and X-rays, to explain “absent treatment” and silent “demon- stration.” RECORDS OF MEETINGS 205 Dr. Scripture said in abstract: Psychanalysis is the term applied to the line of work originated by Freud, of Vienna. Its chief object is to get at the facts of the subconscious. One of its most effective methods is the analysis of dreams. The immediate facts in the dream, the “mani- fest content,” are derived from the immediately preceding experiences of life. The “latent content” is deduced from the “manifest content.” The “latent content” of a dream always consists of a wish or fear. A child disappointed by the size of some Bantam chickens dreamed that she had large Cochin Chinas and thus satisfied her wish. A man dreams that he is bald because he has noticed his hair to be getting thin and fears that he will become bald. The “manifest content” of the dream is often symbolic of the “latent content.” After a consultation with his physician in which the disagreeable experiences of his past life are discussed, a man dreams of being in a laundry watching the clothes boil in the tank. His dreams satisfies the wish to see his “dirty linen” washed clean. A man in financial difficulties dreams of being caught in a terrific snow-storm. This expresses his fear of being “snowed under.” By psychanalysis, the physician gets an accurate knowledge of the patient’s mental make-up; this he can get in no other way. He can then proceed to correct the various defects of character, such as egotism, stubbornness, viciousness, bashfuiness, timidity, etc. Psychanalysis is the only radical cure for hysteria, the phobias and psychasthenia. The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLS, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. ieiMays fou. The Academy met at 8:15 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. There being no business to transact, the Academy then adjourned. Epmunp Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. a. gan BD Section was called to order at 8:18 p. M. by Vice-President George F, Kunz, about 55 members and visitors being present. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. 206: ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES The following programme was then offered : E. O. Hovey, THE CoPpPpER QUEEN MINE, BISBEE, ARIZONA. James G. Manchester, New Discovery oF GEM STONES ON MANHAT- TAN ISLAND. J. F. Kemp, THE SARATOGA MINERAL SPRINGS. A. W. Grabau, SoME SILURIC CoraAL REEFS OF EUROPE. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Hovey exhibited a sketch model of the famous Copper Queen mine and explained the lines on which the complicated geological features of the locality were to be graphically represented. Remarks were made by Professor Kemp and Dr. Berkey. Mr. Manchester described several localities and showed gem material from a few of them. Topaz and beryl were especially well developed in these specimens. Remarks were made by Professor Kemp. Professor Kemp gave a general explanation of the geology of these springs, with suggestions of the origin of the gases and salts carried by them. Dr. Grabau’s paper was given with lantern illustrations, and compari- sons were made with certain similar structures in America. The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 8 May, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: C.-E. A. Winslow, BAcTrErIA AND DECOMPOSITION IN RELATION TO THE Pure Foop Law. L. Hussakof, THE SPOONBILL FISHERY OF THE LOWER MISSISSIPPI. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Winslow discussed certain problems, which have recently arisen in connection with the application of the pure food laws, concern- ing the relation between bacterial multiplication and decomposition. Decomposition, in the ordinary sense of the term, is due to the action of RECORDS OF MEETINGS 207 certain bacteria on certain substances and the mere number of bacteria, without distinction as to kinds, bears no relation to it. The best cri- terion for decomposition would be a chemical test for decomposition products, but no such test has yet been shown to be of general value. Dr. Hussakof gave an account of a trip he had recently made to Mis- sissippi for the purpose of collecting specimens of the paddlefish, Polyodon spathula, for the preparation of an exhibition group in the American Museum. This fish is one of the largest and most interesting found in our fresh waters. It is especially abundant in the lower Mis- sissippi Valley, where it attains a length of 6 feet and a weight of 160 pounds. Some interesting facts were presented, bearing on its natural history and its commercial value. Polyodon roe is said to produce the best caviar in the world. The distribution of Polyodon and of the re- lated Chinese fish, Psephurus, was discussed. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 15 May, 1911. Section met at 8:15 Pp. m., Vice-President Campbell presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: William Campbell, Norres on Antrrriction METALS. SUMMARY OF PAPER. Starting with a series of Thormal diagrams for binary alloys, Dr. Campbell developed certain ternary diagrams and explained many of the common bearing metals thereby. Then, by means of lantern slides, the following systems were discussed and their structures shown: 1. Lead antimony tin. 2. Tin antimony copper. 3. Lead tin antimony copper. 4. Zinc-rich alloys such as lumen, ete. 5. Tin-zinc-rich alloys: Parson’s white brass, ete. Then by way of contrast, numerous alloys rich in copper, with and without lead, which are used for bearing, were shown and their structures and properties explained. The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER, Secretary. 208 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. oe May. 1911. By permission of the Council, no meeting was held. BUSINESS MEETING. 9 OcToBER, 1911. The Academy met at 8:17 p. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidate for active membership in the Academy, recom- mended by Council, was duly elected: Silas C. Wheat, Brooklyn, N. Y. The Recording Secretary pro tem then reported the following deaths: Mrs. Esther Herrman, a Patron for 30 years, Charles H. Senff, a Patron for 16 years, G. Johnston Stoney, an Honorary Member for 8 years, A. B. Meyer, a Corresponding Member for 22 years, Samuel Scudder, a Corresponding Member for 35 years. The Recording Secretary pro lem reported that invitations had been received by the Academy to send accredited delegates to centennials and celebrations of the Natural History Society in Gorlitz, the National University of Greece, the Sixteenth International Congress of Oriental- ists and the Eighteenth International Congress of Americanists. Council will take steps to ascertain whether any foreign or corresponding mem- bers of the Academy are likely to be present at such celebrations to serve as accredited delegates. Council also reported favorable consummation of the negotiations with the St. Louis Academy of Sciences for the mutual exchange of publica- tions. Similar arrangements are to be taken up with the California Academy of Sciences and the Chicago Academy of Sciences. The Recording Secretary pro tem reported that the President had appointed a committee consisting of Professors James F. Kemp and Henry E. Crampton to prepare a suitable minute relative to the recent decease of Mrs. Esther Herrman, to be spread upon the minutes of the Academy and to be sent to the relatives of Mrs. Herrman. Professor Kemp thereupon presented the following minute: RECORDS OF MEETINGS 209 The death of Mrs. Esther Herrman the past summer has removed from the circle of the New York Academy of Sciences one of its oldest members and one of its most generous supporters. Mrs. Herrman was elected in 1881, and has thus for full thirty years been a member and patron. Thirty years ago, the Academy was divided into three classes: members, patrons and subscribers to the building fund. The last named group reminds us of the ambitions which had been cherished that the Academy should possess its own home. When, some fifteen years after, the movement under the guidance of the Scientific Alliance took on new life and vigor, Mrs. Herrman contributed the extremely generous sum of ten thousand dollars toward the fund. As years followed, however, it seemed impossible to complete the large sum required, and when the present close affiliation with the American Museum of Natural History became established, the need of a permanent meeting place no longer existed. Mrs. Herrman then permitted the fund to become an endowment whose income should be applied by the Council of the Academy in the form of grants for research. In this form, the Esther Herrman fund is administered, and will for all the future keep the memory of the generous donor ever living in the minds of our members. Mrs. Herrman was active in many other good works and societies in the City. Universally beloved for her great kindness and profoundly esteemed for the intelligent interest which she took in the various organizations with which she was connected, she was one of the large-hearted citizens who make up the best life of the metropolis. Therefore, be it resolved that this minute be spread upon the records of the Academy and that the Secretary be instructed to transmit a copy to the family of Mrs. Herrman. Vice-President Kunz spoke briefly of the important work performed by Dr. A. B. Meyer, whose death was reported upon. The Academy then adjourned. Henry HK. CRAMPTON, Recording Secretary pro tem. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 9 OcToBER, 1911. Section was called to order at 8:30 Pp. M. by Vice-President George F. Kunz, twenty members and visitors being present. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. There being no special business, the regular scientific programme as announced was presented : D. D. Condit, THE SANDS OF OHIO. Charles P. Berkey, ProMINENT STRUCTURE OF THE NORTHERN MAr- GIN OF THE HIGHLANDS. A, W, Grabau, SomME STRUCTURAL FEATURES OF THE HELDERBERG FRONT, 210 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Mr. Condit’s paper was read by Professor James F. Kemp. A very large number of sands had been studied by Mr. Condit in considerable detail, especially for type of grain and range in mineralogic composition. It seems to establish that sands of the same origin or general source have definite characteristics which distinguish them from others. Comparison of these types of sands has led the author to conclude that the very general absence of certain metamorphic mineral grains, such as garnet, from the earlier sands may have a deeper significance. He suggests that their absence may mean that the metamorphic products are of later date. Remarks were made by Dr. Charles P. Berkey, in which attention was called to the sweeping nature of the conclusion suggested by Mr. Condit and pointing out other possible reasons for such widespread failure of the metamorphic grains. Dr. George F. Kunz remarked the wide range of specific gravities represented in the list of minerals determined by Mr. Condit and drew attention to the differences of behavior that this would bring about in the processes of assorting and deposition. Professor A. W. Grabau called special attention to the part of the paper dealing with size of grains and evidence of their wear and em- phasized the work of wind in connection with the development of the great sandstone formations. Dr. Berkey gave special attention to the results of recent studies in the Moodna Valley and adjacent ground. The great thrust which passes through Cornwall on the Hudson was classified, and some of the data bearing upon its importance and the amount of displacement involved were given. It is the author’s opinion that a total displacement of 2,000 feet or more is indicated by conditions at this fault. Lantern slides of the fault were shown. Remarks were made by Professor J. F. Kemp. Professor Grabau described and illustrated the complex structure in- cluding faults and folds as recently determined by him in the Helderberg limestone strata near Catskill. Diagrams showing reconstructions of the formational positions were shown. The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 211 SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 16 OctoBErR, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. m., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas pre- siding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. The meeting was devoted to the following illustrated lecture: Charles H. Townsend, THe VoyaGe oF THE Albatross TO THE GULF OF CALIFORNIA. SUMMARY OF PAPER. In the spring of 1911, the Albatross, under the direction of Dr. Townsend, Director of the New York Aquarium, made a natural history survey of the Gulf of California. Much valuable information was ob- tained bearing on the oceanography and the general biology of this region, and especially the deep-sea forms. After stating that the American Museum of Natural History, the New York Zodlogical Society, the New York Botanical Garden and the United States National Museum codper- ated in the voyage of the Albatross by special arrangement with the U. 8. Bureau of Fisheries, Dr. Townsend gave a general account of the work done. The Albatross sailed from San Diego. Twenty-six hauls of the dredge were made, the deepest being 1,760 fathoms. Shore work was carried on at 32 anchorages around the peninsula of Lower California and at islands in the gulf. Important collections of mammals, birds, reptiles and plants were made. A special study was made of the fishery resources of the region. An interesting feature of the expedition was the rediscovery of the supposed extinct elephant seal, Mirounga. About 100 of these animals were found at Guadeloupe Island, which is unin- habited. Six yearlings were sent alive to the New York Aquarium, and three large males and a female were secured for skins and skeletons. The males were each 16 feet long. Excellent photographs were made. Among the interesting things obtained by dredging were Harriotta and Cyema, two deep-sea fishes not previously recorded from the Pacific. The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor, Secretary. 212 ANNALN NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 23 OctToBER, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: William Campbell, Some RecENT DEVELOPMENTS IN METALLURGY. SUMMARY OF PAPER. Professor Campbell, starting with the definitions of metallurgy and metallography, first discussed the structure of metals and the effect of annealing such material as drawn or rolled nickel contrasted with that of very low carbon steel (Stead’s Brittleness). The modern classification of alloys, according to solubility in the liquid and solid states, was illustrated with examples such as monel metal, the brasses, the lead-tin solders and the lead-antimony group. Changes in the solid state were shown by the bronzes with Shepherd’s diagram; iron and steel with the various dia- grams from the Rooseboom-Roberts Austen to Upton; the effect of heat- treatment, hardening and tempering. The ternary alloys were illustrated by the white metals, lead tin antimony, tin antimony copper; by German silver, plastic and phospher bronzes, ete. Finally the work of Friederich on sulphides and arsenides and of the Geo-Physical Laboratory on sili- cates was summarized. The Section then adjourned. Epwarp J. THATCHER, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND PSYCHOLOGY. 30 OcToBER, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Gen. James Wilson Grant presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Marshall H. Saville, TRAVELS IN THE LAKE REGION OF NORTHERN Ecuapbor. The Section then adjourned. F, LyMan WELLS, Secretary. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 213 BUSINESS MEETING. 6 NoveMBER, 1911. The Academy met at 8:25 Pp. M. at the American Museum of Natural History, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. The Recording Secretary reported the following deaths: Elliott C. Smith, Active Member for 6 years, The Recording Secretary also reported the acceptance of an invitation to participate in and send delegates to the Eighth International Con- gress of Applied Chemistry. The Recording Secretary spoke of the desirability of the Academy be- coming a member of the Seismological Society of America, and on motion it was voted to refer the matter with approval to the Council for action. The Academy then adjourned. EpMuND Oris Hovey, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY. 6 NovEMBER, 1911. Section met at 8:35 p. m., Vice-President George F. Kunz presiding, twenty-five members and visitors being present. The minutes of the iast meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. The following programme was then offered : George F. Kunz, ON THE OCCURRENCE OF OPAL IN NORTHERN NEVADA AND IDAHO. After the discussion of Dr. Kunz’s paper, several brief accounts of scientific observations were made by members of the Section. Dr. E. O. Hovey gave a preliminary note on Meteor Crater, or “Coon Butte,” Arizona. This was based on a personal visit recently made by Dr. Hovey. The view that this remarkable depression has been formed by meteor impact is believed to account for the facts observed on the ground. Remarks were made by Professor Martin calling attention to Mr. Gil- bert’s impact theory for the origin of lunar craters also. 944 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES Professor Kemp called attention to Mr. Gilbert’s experimental work on the forms of wounds that can be made by impact of clay pellets against a clay background. Yecent discoveries of shell remains buried beneath the drift of Lower Manhattan Island were noted by Professor J. F. Kemp. At the close of this scientific programme the required business of the Section was taken up. Dr. Hovey nominated and Professor Kemp seconded Professor J. E. Woodman, of New York University, as chairman of the Section and Vice-President of the Academy. After the casting of the ballot of the Section, Professor Woodman was declared the nominee to be recom- mended to the Council. . Dr. C. P. Berkey was nominated and elected Secretary of the Section. SUMMARY OF PAPER. Dr. Kunz described the finds of opal and the characteristics of the gem and showed cut specimens. He said in abstract: For the past twenty-five years, there have been found over quite a region at the juncture of southwest Idaho, southeast Oregon and northern Nevada small specimens of opal as float in various parts of the region. Opals from Drewsey, Oregon, have been described by the writer and also specimens from Washington State, the opal being found quite a dis- tance to the north. In 1889, there was sent to New York a specimen of opal one inch long, half an inch wide and one-quarter of an inch thick that was good fire opal: a drift pebble, either out of some gravels or a river bed. The color was excellent and quite equal to the pale yellow fire opal from Queretaro, Mexico. About three years ago, some specimens of opal were found in northern Nevada, at a point west of the Santa Rosa Mountains. This was of what is known as the fire-opal variety, not precious opal such as was found in Washington State; indeed, it rather resembled certain types of the Mexican opal from the State of Queretaro. Of these Nevada opals, some represent the absolutely transparent, pellucid type, either with large flames of color, or else with a smaller harlequin flaking. These change perceptibly into pale yellow, yellow brown, brown, and sometimes they are only sub-translucent but with a great play of color which changes finally into black. A number of shades include a black, strongly re- sembling the hue of certain types of crude petroleum, or that of the darker types of Burman or Roumanian amber. More recently, another locality has been found eight miles from that RECORDS OF MEETINGS 215 above noted. This has furnished a number of specimens remarkable for their large flames of red, strongly resembling lumachella marble. A number of these are lusterless, and many of them are more or less cracked, partly due to the fact that they have a large water content, and partly because a number of them have been found very near the surface. In some respects, the formation resembles the deposit discovered in White Cliffs, New South Wales, where some of the opals are pseudo- morphs, being opals after wood or other objects. There was a newer find in 1911, a limb of a tree measuring fifty centimeters, or nearly two feet, in length and eight centimeters across; this was entirely changed to opal; the outer parts were very brilliant, whereas the center was of the dull, common opal variety. Some of the opals are equal to the finest Mexican material, the colorless and a number of new varieties. In nearly every instance, these masses are found in decomposed vol- canic rock, or in ash that has hardened. Apparently there must have been a later flow of opaline waters to change them to this form. The deposit is west of the Santa Rosa Mountains and near the Trout Forest Range and the Pine Forest Range. Some of the stones cut several years ago still hold their color, but it is possible that a number of them may not be of the more durable type. ‘This is the most interesting occurrence of opal that has yet been noted in the United States. The deposit found in 1909 was traced to a depth of 16 feet, whereas the opalized tree and later deposits above mentioned were found at a depth of only two feet. There have at various times come to me various opal from Lovelock, in the southern part of Humboldt Co., Nevada, and wood opal from the northeastern part of Humboldt Co.; also opal in concretionary masses from Austin in the southeastern corner of Lander County, as well as from Caldwell, Idaho, Rockville and Score Creek, Owhyhee County, Idaho. There was opal also from Clover Creek, Lincoln County, in the Snake River region in the southwestern part of Idaho and from Baker and Durkee in Oregon, Walla Walla, Douglas County, and Whelan near Mexico, Idaho, as well as near the Salmon River. This furnished the finest precious opal that has been found on the continent, the opal oc- curring as nodules in a very hard trachitic rock resembling the rock in which the precious opal is found in Hungary. A single stone was worth one thousand dollars. An impure variety has been found in Dunsmuir, Siskiyou Co., northern California. Opal is also found in the desert near Reno, and it is possible that it may be found in many places near there, both in excellent gem varieties as well as the finer qualities. Re- marks were made by Professor Martin. The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. 216 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 13 NOVEMBER, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting were read and approved. Dr. Frederic A. Lucas was nominated for Vice-President of the Acad- emy and Chairman of the Section for 1912. Dr. W. K. Gregory was elected Secretary of the Section for 1912. The following programme was then offered: W. K. Gregory, FurRTHER NOTES ON THE EVOLUTION OF PAIRED FINS. C. William Beebe, Nores ON A PHEASANT EXPEDITION TO ASIA. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Dr. Gregory said in abstract: The problem under consideration is a phase of vertebrate phylogeny and should be studied in connection with this larger problem. In very early acquiring myotomes, the ancestral vertebrates gained a means of locomotion, by lateral flexures of the body, that was more efficient than movement by means of ciliated epidermis. The earliest vertebrates probably fed on microscopic particles obtained by ciliary ingestion. ‘The Upper Silurian Birkenia of Traquair ap- parently had no biting jaws and may have sucked in small food particles, like the larval lamprey. Well-preserved material showed that none of the Ostracoderms had cartilage jaws or teeth, but the dermal plaques around the oral hood sometimes functioned as jaws. ‘Typically carniv- orous habits, involving true cartilage jaws, true teeth and both paired and median fins, are first known in the Acanthodian sharks, of the Upper Silurian and Devonian. In brief, fins of all kinds, conditioned in their first appearance by the presence of myotomes, were evolved as an incident in the general transformation of acraniate minute forms, with ciliary ingestion, into well-cephalized fishes of carnivorous habits. The speaker reviewed the evidence for the “fin-fold” theory in the different groups and stated some apparently new objections to the “gill arch” theory. He cited evidence tending to show that the various paddle-like types of paired fins with widely protruded basal cartilages had evolved from fin folds independently in the sharks, Crossopterygians and Dipnoans. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. Mr. Beebe gave a short talk, illustrated with lantern slides, on the recent trip which he and Mrs. Beebe made around the world in search of RECORDS OF MERTINGS 914 material for a monograph of the Phasianide. This expedition was made under the auspices of the New York Zodlogical Society and at the sug- gestion and by the financial support of Col. Anthony R. Kuser. In the short time at his disposal, he was able to touch only upon Ceylon and the Himalayas. In Ceylon, the junglefowl peculiar to the island and the India peafowl were studied and their nests and eggs found, and in the Himalayas every genus of pheasant was investigated, from Genneus melanonotus at six thousand feet, to /thaginis cruentus at an elevation of fourteen thousand feet. The three most important points brought out were the tremendous economic importance of this grown, our ignorance of their ecology and the rapidity of their extermination. The Section then adjourned. L. HussaKor, Secretary. SECTION OF ASTRONOMY, PHYSICS AND CHEMISTRY. 20 NOVEMBER, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Campbell presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. Prof. Charles Lane Poor was nominated for Vice-President of the Academy and Chairman of the Section for 1912. Prof. F. M. Pedersen was elected Secretary of the Section for 1912. The Section then adjourned. EDWARD J. THATCHER, Secretary. SECTION OF ANTHROPOLOGY AND: PSYCHOLOGY. 2% NovEMBER, 1911. Section met in conjunction with the New York Branch of the Ameri- can Psychological Association, at 8:15 P. M. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and ap- proved. The following programme was offered: D. O. Lyon, THE RELATION OF THE QUICKNESS OF LEARNING TO RETENTIVENESS. H. L. Hollingsworth, THE AcTION oF PHARMACOLOGICAL AGENTS AS AN AID IN THE CLASSIFICATION OF MENTAL PROCESSES, 918 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES 8.8. Colvin, INVESTIGATIONS IN PROGRESS IN THE PSYCHO- LOGICAL LABORATORY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS. J. W. Todd, REACTION TO SIMULTANEOUS STIMULI. D. E. Rice, VisuaL AcuITy UNDER LIGHTS OF DIFFERENT CoLors. A.T. Poffenberger, Reaction Time ror DIFFERENT RETINAL AREAS. R. S. Woodworth, CORRELATIONS OF ASSOCIATION TESTS. G. C. Meyers, EXPERIMENTS ON INCIDENTAL MEMorY. The Section then adjourned. F. Lyman WELLS, Secretary. BUSINESS MEETING. 4 DECEMBER, 1911. The Academy met at 8:20 p. mM. at the American Museum of Natural llistory, Vice-President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last business meeting were read and approved. The following candidates for membership in the Academy, recom- mended by Council, were duly elected: ActTIvVE MEMBERSHIP. Dr. Joseph Byrne, 29 West 61st Street, George Borup, New Haven, Conn. ASSOCIATE MEMBERSHIP. C. C. Mook, Metuchen, N. J. The Academy then adjourned. EpMuND Ot1s Hovey, Recording Secretary. SECTION OF GEOLOGY AND. MINERALOGY. 4. DecEMBER, 1911. Section met at 8:25 p. M., Vice-President George F. Kunz presiding. The reading of the minutes of the last meeting of the Section was dis- pensed. with. The following programme was then offered: RECORDS OF MEETINGS 219 H. E. Crampton, GroLocicaL OBSERVATIONS ON THE REGION OF THE KAITEUR FALLs AND Mt. Roraima, BRITISH GUIANA. Victor Ziegler, THE SILICEOUS OOLITES or CENTRAL PENNSYLVANIA. SUMMARY OF PAPERS. The expedition described by Professor Crampton was undertaken for biologic rather than geologic exploration, and a great number of most interesting geological observations were made and photographs were shown covering the region seldom reached by white travellers. The gen- eral structure of the region was explained, and the general physiographic features were described in a very instructive way. Remarks were made and questions were asked by Dr. Kunz and Professors Kemp and Wood- man. Dr. Ziegler’s paper was read by Dr. Berkey in the absence of the au- thor. The discussion covered a summary of previous work on siliceous odlites, their occurrence and distribution, detailed sections of the rock formations and petrographic descriptions, with microphotographic illus- trations and a discussion of the origin of the odlites. The Section then adjourned. CHARLES P. BERKEY, Secretary. SECTION OF BIOLOGY. 11 December, 1911. Section met at 8:15 p. M., Vice-President Frederic A. Lucas presiding. The minutes of the last meeting of the Section were read and approved. The following programme was then offered: Henry E. Crampton, Explorations IN GUIANA AND BRAZIL. W. K. Gregory, NoTES ON THE ORIGIN OF PAIRED Limes OF TER- RESTRIAL VERTEBRATES. e: Lane * SUMMARY OF PAPERS. Professor Crampton gave an account of a biological survey he made ° during the past summer from Georgetown, on the coast of British Guiana, to the mountains of Roraima—the tableland that stands at the junction of Brazil, Venezuela and British Guiana. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. Dr. Gregory said in abstract: In the problem of the origin of the Tetrapod limbs, no homological value should be attached to Klaatsch’s 99() ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES comparisons between the pectoral paddles of Polypterus and the fore limb of Urodeles until the phylogenetic relations of Polypterus to the Devonian Osteolepida and of the latter to the Amphibia has been evalu- ated, at least provisionally. Similarly, no homological value should be attached to the limb-like form and functions of the paddles of Ceratodus until the relationship of the latter to the Devonian Dipnoans and Osteo- lepida has been taken into account. That the Dipnoi are related to the Osteolepida is indicated especially by the agreement in certain histologi- eal characters of the teeth and scales, in the character of the median and paired fins, etc. If the Amphibia came off from this Pre-Devonian Osteolepid-Dipnoan stem, the hiatus in both the geological record and in the evolutionary sequence is a great one. I feel that there was cumula- tive evidence for the view that the Amphibia has been derived from fishes of some sort and more particularly that these fishes possess the following characters: functional gills and “lungs,” homologous with those of Dipnoi and Crossopterygii, chondrocranium covered with bones having the same ultimate derivation as the scales, skull elements very largely correspond- ing with those of Ganoids but probably independently evolved, opercular bone reduced or absent, preoperculum giving rise to the true squamosal of Tetrapods (overlapping the quadrate), hyomandibular large, giving rise to the columella auris, scales without ganoine, primary shoulder girdle and pelvis becoming bony, body short, head large depressed, noto- chord persistent, fore and hind paddles similar in form and function, median and caudal fin reduced. A detailed comparison of the shoulder girdle and pectoral paddle of one of the Rhizodonts, the Sauripterus of Hall, with those of other fishes and Tetrapods leads to the following provisional comparisons: Sauripterus Tetrapod “Infraclavicle” (clavicle of Oegenbaur) Clavicle “Clavicle” (Cleithrum of Oegenbaur) Cleithrum Scapulo-coracoid Scapulo-coracoid Single “basal piece” Humerus “Basals” collectively Fore arm and carpus “Radials” collectively Digits In view of the marked differences, however, in the skull between the Rhizodonts and the Amphibia, we cannot say whether these resemblances are convergent or homogenetic. The paper was illustrated with lantern slides. The Section then adjourned. L. Hussakor, Secretary. RECORDS OF MEETINGS Oil ANNUAL MEETING. 18 December, 1911. The Academy met for the Annual Meeting on Monday, 18 December, 1911, at the Hotel Endicott, at the close of the annual dinner, Vice- President Kunz presiding in the absence of President Boas. The minutes of the last Annual Meeting, 19 December, 1910, were read and approved. Reports were presented by the Corresponding Secretary, the Recording Secretary, the Librarian and the Editor, all of which, on motion, were ordered received and placed on file. They are published herewith. The Treasurer read his detailed report, showing a net cash balance of $1,356.58 on hand at the close of business, 30 November, 1911. On motion, this report was received and referred to the Finance Committee for audit. The following candidates for honorary membership and fellowship, recommended by Council, were duly elected : Honorary MEMBERS. Prof. Hermann Credner, Geologist, University of Leipzig, Leipzig, Germany, presented by Prof. J. J. Stevenson. Prof. Ernst Mach, Physicist, University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria, presented by Dr. R. H. Lowie. Prof. Edward B. Poulton, Biologist, University of Oxford, Oxford, England, presented by Prof. Bashford Dean. FELLOWS. Prof. Charles R. Eastman, Carnegie Museum, Pittsburgh, Pa. Prof. F. M. Pedersen, College of the City of New York, New York. The Academy then proceeded to the election of officers for the year 1912. The ballots prepared by the Council in accordance with the By- Laws were distributed. On motion, it was unanimously voted that the Recording Secretary cast one ballot for the entire list nominated by the Council. This was done, and they were declared elected, more than the requisite number of members and fellows entitled to vote being present : 999 ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES President, Emerson MoMILLIN. Vice-Presidents, J. Eomunp WoopMAN (Section of Geology and Miner- alogy), Freperic A. Lucas (Section of Biology), CHARLES LANE Poor (Section of Astronomy, Physics and Chemistry), R. 8. WoopwortH (Section of Anthropology and Psychology). Corresponding Secretary, Henry KH. CRAMPTON. Recording Secretary, EpMuND OTIs Hovey. Treasurer, CHARLES F’. Cox. Librarian, RaLPH W. Tower. Editor, Epmunp OT1s Hovey. Councilors (to serve 3 years), CHARLES P. BeRKEY, CLARK WISSLER. Finance Committee, Emerson McMittin, F. 8. Len, G. F. Kunz. At the close of the elections, the Recording Secretary read the address of the retiring President, Professor Franz Boas, upon “The History of the American Race.” After the reading of the presidential address, Mr. George Borup, a graduate student at Yale University, related a few of his most interesting experiences in connection with Admiral Peary’s North Polar Expedition of 1908-1909. At the close of his remarks, Mr. Borup gave a concise and illuminating résumé of the scientific problems remaining to be studied in the North, including the actual visiting of Crocker Land, the land which Peary saw from Grant Land in 1906 but which lay too far to the westward for him to visit. Mr. Borup’s remarks were illustrated with lantern slide views. The Academy then adjourned. EpmunpD Otis Hovey, Recording Secretary. REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY. We have lost by death during the past year the following Honorary Members : Sir Francis Galton, elected in 1910, G. Johnstone Stoney, elected in 1904, and the following Corresponding Members: A. B. Meyer, elected in 1890, Samuel H. Scudder, elected in 1876. There are at present upon our rolls 47 Honorary Members and 127 Corresponding Members. Respectfully submitted, Henry E. CRAMPTON, Corresponding Secretary. RECORDS OF MEETINGS 223 REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY. During the year 1911, the Academy held 8 business meetings and 27 sectional meetings, at which 61 stated papers were presented on the fol- lowing subjects : Geology, 14 papers; Mineralogy, 5 papers; Biology, 14 papers; Anthro- pology, 3 papers; Ethnology, 2 papers; Psychology, 16 papers; Physics, 6 papers; Chemistry, 1 paper. Two public lectures have been given at the American Museum to the members of the Academy and the Affiliated Societies and their friends, as follows: “Recent Celestial Photographs with a Sixty-Inch Reflector of the Mount Wilson Observatory.” By G. W. Ritchie. “The Depths of the Sea.” By Sir John Murray. At the present time, the membership of the Academy includes 502 Active Members, 19 of whom are Associate Members, 120 Fellows, 90 Life Members and 11 Patrons. The election of 3 Fellows is pending. There have been 10 deaths during the year, 26 resignations have become effective, 7 names have been dropped from the roll on account of non- payment of dues, 1 name has been transferred to the list of Life Members and 1 has been transferred to the list of Non-Resident Members. Nine new members have been elected during the year. As the membership of the Academy a year ago was 538, there has been a net loss of 36 during the year 1911. Announcement is made with regret of the loss by death of the following members: Bernard G. Amend, Active Member for 45 years, William G. Davies, Active Member for 35 years, C. A. Herter, Active Member for 17 years, Mrs. Esther Herrman, Patron for 30 years, James J. Higginson, Active Member for 4 years, John S. Huyler, Active Member for 6 years, R. P. Lounsberry, Active Member for 6 years, Col. J. J. MeCook, Life Member for 15 years, Mrs. A. K. Nimick, Life Member for 4 years, Hon. J. H. Robb, Active Member for 3 years, Charles Senff, Patron for 16 years. W. H. J. Sieberg, Active Member for 34 years, Elliott C. Smith, Active Member for 4 years, Miss P. Caroline Swords, Life Member for 1 vear, A. H. Wellington, Active Member for 4 years, Rey. J. L. Zabriskie, Active Member for 1 year. Respectfully submitted, EpMunpD Ot1s Hovey, Recording Secretary. 294. ANNALS NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES REPORT OF THE LIBRARIAN. The library of the New York Academy of Sciences has received during the year ending December, 1911, through exchange and donation, 375 volumes and 1720 numbers. Important lacune have been received from the Tiflisser Physikalischen Observatorium, the Provincial Utrechtsch Genootschap, L’Académie Imperiale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts de Lyon, the North of England Institute of Mining and Mechanical Engineers, the Real Academia de Ciencias y Artes de Barcelona, the Physikalisch-Medicinische Gesellschaft zu Wiirzburg and the Naturhis- torisk Forening 1 Kjobenhavn. Special acknowledgments are herewith made to these six institutions for their generosity and assistance in sup- plying their valuable and much needed publications. Respectfully submitted, RautpH W. Tower, Inbrarian. REPORT OF THE EDITOR. The Editor reports that during the past fiscal year there were issued Part III, completing Volume XX, and pages 1-175 of Volume XXI. Respectfully submitted, EpmunpD Otis Hovey, Editor. REPORT OF THE TREASURER. RECEIPTS. DECEMBER 1, 1910—NoOVEMBER 30, 1911. Cashvon hand. December. 1) 1910. c. oe o ecient toc cee sey a $3,259.74 Income from investments: Interest on mortgages on New York City real estate... $860.00 Interest on railroad and other bonds................ 1,260.00 Interest onubaniabalancesaeene asec 77.08 2,197.08 uife membership feehs 44.0 s coeds 6 ae eres rte oe teks chien arene 100.00 Active membership) duwes, WOON. ye. ei ciee sree cieeeneeshe ene e $45.00 - % MONO 8E/5 Bethe sie oe Aes = 165.00 * $6 NOW esac ta arsisnageiels oc Stee eeeaens 3,255.00 3,465 .00 Associate membership auesy 101 Osis secre cieieeitcreeienine: 6.00 Ce ee (2) [0 Aen en mien Nia A .cla Sick 39.00 45.00 Sales: of publMeations sis OSes Falke eles Ore edt epee etree reieeaveroi ieee 154.24 Subseriptions:toranntiall dimmer ey totic coker toro eee etene ae eee eee 106.00 Totals... of Fe Me Fee ak SERN eee) eee hr $9,327.06 RECORDS OF MEETINGS DISBURSEMENTS. DECEMBER 1, 1910—NovEMBER 30, 1911. iPuplicanonssony account, of Ammals: .....ccccs ce cece sere ECT CRELOME Ole PESAULLOLUI arene acm ctotors y's sites © sale. e. o1e/e 0 | Sle iane s/oremieie cere ei RVECOLMIN Se NCCLEbALYASHEXPCNSES). o.6 cic sisrasic'e «6 eieisels s aie parelselid aeisinoen WVECORMING NeCretaryes: AllOWANCE.. che aw piiec els © oe chee cele clea siete WMECHUNE COMM CEC Mercreiers toe susr ch = ars (ect stece:Sie-cacs eye 0: bile ele. o owe sues Bul ele Generale xp NGOS wert eke eet oars) o1cces okenaiaTei\s''s) «etre, eh averse ofele cuetetelere mil HSther Herrman nesecarchy bund (erants)) .s6. ococ0 sce s «cece ence PLC AAQUATTEESE © OMIM TELCO sere sc ccs cere Gleam 6 ss1 6s: 6< rare slat oveye aiteeveveratiacrart PAINT IMEC HINT OFAN) Gg OTY: Seles ain! s cyeiers'e avae dco w » oie’ severe siete clef eran Purchase of bonds and commission imterest charzefon! bonds purchased. si.5.. 556.6566 bese as GASH POMS MATT enarsrssc ate letetate iaretate eiarsicrsrehare ci sieia bo Sos. Sieve. sm she eiave Sela eis BALANCE SHEET, NOVEMBER 30, 1911. Investments (cost) ........ $41,656.25 Permanent Fund Cashvonwhandpeacaceeaces < 1,356.58 Publication Fund Audubon Fund .. Esther Herrman Research IMDWVOl Ss oop noes John Strong ©/a. she, eset ah wie a a}m] 0] .em)! s/o, s\ os @) (a ele) 6] 6 6c) ee ae: a ealelalalels eo) oe) >| ro. ae at ae ne rn WO Roe be ae gh ’ e ry . * ph dhe ay fe uw . 4 GE) a ‘: J 4 owe re th a ay Hale mae oa ay Me . fb thay) alba aie se ed | « : A ‘ “a v “a 4, Ap oe §) i i . . % ; bo iw. ise. oi Mh, a ene | sles +e ‘ ; ae ny. an 4 s : ; mK? hi ae \ ean ’ = : r ‘3 . "FT LA ita tas \ ahs, s sit, x ik Atm Ms iP cy * 4 A * GN, } bialbove . Mi stterey, bens ve | Si A Vs, Chas! ie aa ; : Jat - . ' ic ar ee Ti idee er ae Le ayes Meineke). sd aan f he, mY, TL eee Od Ee OE sie Pi ieee hte. ‘ d , 5 AH " e™ \ ie 1. i i ane Cth PO ee ‘ sh > ‘- en ee Ca / * ' vet ' ee aka MT ; ine vie Fi e epi ‘\ ha aight od fe AN * / ; rf on ae ' Paha i j J Te PAL a vast e 5 : Oe hdl mm ry f wy Poa ro Peer pant i Une Jia Te a ey A ae Seale hat gi’, Loa AOL aa ae hie f . : Tee. ; NGy 71 4 Pt ie Ae id er nity ye Ay YO) oe iG et ane eh a8 \: ‘ ne b gael uae Be LS ha “oe i a, eae The re) Rab puts wee aan, a6, 2 EN. Ca amici) a er | } ci iyi as 6p. Sie ei y Mpeaweers 80. SNR. Cb ae i i SM et a od Ns Cg Ue i eta ile yet Sir A Fgh ho. WU Bay Qiks ‘ aN 2")8 a ¢ b Fe vg % ied | See * ad AOR Cp abe ee as ¥ ae ae AS MEN PUBLICATIONS OF THE NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES (Lyceum or Naturau History, 1817-1876) The publications of the Academy consist of two series, viz.: (1) The Annals (octavo series), established in 1823, contain the scientific contributions and reports of researches, together with the rec- ords of meetings and similar matter. A volume of the Annals coincides in general with the calendar year and is sold at the uniform price of three dollars per volume. The articles composing the volume are printed separately, each in its own cover, and are distributed in bundles on an average of three per year. The price of the separate articles depends upon their lengih and the number of illus- trations, and may be learned upon application to the Librarian of the Academy. ‘The author receives his separates as soon as his paper has been printed, the date of issue appearing avove the title of each paper. (2) The Memoirs (quarto series), established in 1895, are issued at irregular intervals. It is intended that each volume shall be devoted to monographs relating to some particular department of Science. Volume I is devoted to Astronomical Memoirs, Volume II to Zodlogical Memoirs, ete. The price is one dollar per part as issued. All publications are sent free to Fellows and Active Members. The Annals are sent to Honorary and Corresponding Members desiring them. _ Subscriptions and inquiries concerning current and back numbers of any of the publications of the Academy should be addressed to THe LIBRARIAN, New York Academy of Sciences, care of: American Museum of Natural History, New York, N. Y. Diese ¢ era 4 Panels : ay i ql ; al in en ee? HA yi he; 3 5185 00258 3548 Satht aein ie nedandsas atant